JP2015139638A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine for enabling a player to increase interest in notice performance executed in a start storage display area.SOLUTION: A start storage display area 41b is divided into a plurality of small areas, start storage display control means (performance control device 300) displays one start storage display (decoration special symbol start storage display C) in one small area, and can execute notice performance that previously notices a prior determination result (read-ahead result) by prior determination means (game control device 100) in an empty small area with no start storage display (decoration special symbol start storage display C) displayed among the plurality of small areas.

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display device capable of executing a variable display game based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area, and provides a player with a predetermined game value when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a special game to be granted.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game is played on an effect display device such as a liquid crystal display, and a game value can be given to a player in relation to the result of the game. It is common.
And as such a gaming machine, what performs a notice effect that gives a notice (notification, suggestion) of the result of the game by displaying a part of a symbol that will appear next in the game is known. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).
Further, in recent gaming machines, as a notice effect, when a game execution right is generated, the execution result of the game is determined, and the start displayed in the start memory display area of the effect display device according to the determination result There is also known one that performs a so-called reservation prefetch notice effect that changes the display mode of the memory display.

JP 2002-263291 A

  However, since the conventional reservation pre-reading notice effect is a monotonous effect that only changes the display mode of the start memory display, it has been difficult to enhance the interest of the player.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a player with respect to a notice effect executed in a start memory display area.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention described in claim 1
A variable display device capable of executing a variable display game based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area,
In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result,
The display area of the variable display device includes a main display area in which the variable display game is executed, and a start-up storage display area.
Start memory means capable of storing start memory as a right to execute the variable display game based on the inflow of game balls into the start area up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Start memory display control means for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means in the start memory display area;
Pre-determining means for determining the result of the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means before the execution of the variable display game,
The start memory display area is divided into a plurality of small areas,
The start memory display control means includes
One start memory display is displayed in one small area,
It is characterized in that a notice effect for notifying a preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means can be executed in an empty small area in which the start storage display is not displayed among the plurality of small areas.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the notice effect for notifying the prior determination result is executed in an empty small area (small area where the start memory display is not displayed) among a plurality of small areas included in the start memory display area. Because it is possible, it is possible to execute a novel announcement effect that is not possible in the past, and it is possible for a player to execute a notification effect in an unexpected region, and a notification effect to be executed in the start memory display region On the other hand, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The start memory display control means displays a notice display for notifying the preliminary determination result in the empty small area as the notice effect, and changes the display mode of the notice display according to the number of the empty small areas. It is characterized in that the production can be executed.

  According to the second aspect of the present invention, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying a notice display in an empty small area as a notice effect and changing the display mode of the notice display according to the number of empty small areas. In addition to being able to execute a novel announcement effect that has never existed in the past, it is possible for a player to execute a notification effect in an unexpected region, which can bring unexpectedness to the announcement effect.

The invention according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The empty small area is displayed in a display mode for notifying one of the results that can be determined by the prior determination means,
The start memory display control means corresponds to the start memory in the empty small area displayed in the display mode for notifying the advance determination result for the start memory among the plurality of empty small areas as the notice effect. An effect of displaying the start memory display to be performed can be executed.

  According to the third aspect of the present invention, the start corresponding to the start-up memory is displayed in the free small area displayed in the display mode for notifying the advance determination result for the start-up memory among the plurality of free small areas as the notice effect. Since it is possible to execute an effect that displays a memory display, it is possible to execute a novel advance notice effect that is not possible in the past, and it is also possible for a player to execute an advance notice effect in an unexpected region. Can bring unexpectedness.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the notice effect executed in the start memory display area.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval 2 process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transfer setting process during interval 1. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during interval 1. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval 2; It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2. FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating an example of operation | movement in jackpot in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a timing chart for demonstrating an example of operation | movement in jackpot in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process which an effect control apparatus performs. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the notice lottery process during the first half change. It is a flowchart explaining the notice lottery process during the latter half change. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario analysis process. It is a figure for demonstrating the notice effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario table used at the time of step-up notice A in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario table used at the time of step-up notice A in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect (step-up notice A) in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect (step-up notice A) in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario table used at the time of step-up notice B in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect (step-up notice B) in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of an expectation degree suggestion image. It is a timing chart for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement in the step-up notice effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a prefetch lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining a prefetch notice scenario control process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display area of a display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the rotation bar displayed on the starting memory | storage display area of a display apparatus. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the character displayed in the character effect area | region of a rotation bar, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the holding | maintenance change area | region of a rotation bar. It is a figure explaining an example of the rotation timing of a rotation bar. It is a figure explaining an example of the pattern "prefetching notice effect performed in a character effect area" which does not perform operation display during rotation. It is a figure explaining an example of "the prefetch notice effect performed in a mini game area". It is a figure explaining an example of the pattern "pre-reading notice effect performed in a character effect area" which performs operation | movement display during rotation. It is a figure explaining an example of the additional reservation effect performed when additional reservation generate | occur | produces during execution of "the prefetch notice effect performed in a character effect area." It is a figure explaining an example of the additional reservation effect performed when additional reservation generate | occur | produces during execution of "the prefetch notice effect performed in a mini game area | region." It is a flowchart explaining the prefetch notice scenario control process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a notice production possible field. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure explaining an example of the prefetch notice effect performed when the present game state is a normal game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the prefetch notice effect performed when the present game state is a specific game state in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the prefetch notice scenario control process in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the lottery of the notice display mode in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the prefetch notice effect in the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.
In addition, the left and right portions of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces an effect of a game by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition for the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
In the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning prize is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Also, an ordinary variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided immediately below the starting winning opening 36.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side. A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which a game ball cannot flow is maintained. When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, a game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
Also, below the normal variation winning device 37, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like is provided.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a first that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A special variable winning device (large winning port 2, upper winning port) 38 is provided.
The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is changed from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). In other words, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by an upper large winning solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. In the small hit game state, by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state, the game balls can easily flow into the big prize opening, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player It is supposed to be. Note that an upper count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the grand prize winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning prize opening. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two upper count switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening is detected by any one of the upper count switches 38a. By providing a plurality of the upper count switches 38a as described above, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening.

In addition, immediately below the first special variable winning device 38, a second special variable winning device (a large winning mouth 1, under the first prize winning port 1, which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game. 39 is provided.
The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is changed from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes, for example, a big prize opening opened / closed by an open / close door 39c driven by a lower big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. In the small hit game state, by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state, the game balls can easily flow into the big prize opening, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player It is supposed to be. Note that a lower count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the big winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening.
In the case of the present embodiment, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened every big hit round.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim to win the start winning opening 36 by firing the game ball to the left game area by adjusting the firing force (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called By right-handing), it is possible to aim for winning in the normal start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 which form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display part (general figure display) 53 for the common figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the LED lamp Storage display units 54, 55, and 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game.
Further, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit (first game state display unit, right-handed notification unit) 57 for notifying that a right-handed game state is more advantageous than a left-handed game. The second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator, time shortening state notifying unit) 58 that lights up when the state occurs to notify the occurrence of the short time state, and the jackpot probability state when the game machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state 3rd game state display part (3rd game state display, probability state display part) 59 which displays that it has become, Round display which displays the number of rounds at the time of big hit (opening and closing frequency of special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39) A portion 60 is provided.
The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the center segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked to change. It is configured to display that it is inside.
When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game, and when the result of the game is “win”, the result of out of game (special result mode) is not. A game result is displayed with a result form (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result form turned on.

The normal display 53 displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time, by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change.
In the case of the present embodiment, among the lamps D8, D10, and D18 constituting the general map display 53, only the lamp D8 is turned on when the game result is out of order, and the game result is a hit and the stop symbol When the number is “1”, only the lamp D10 is turned on, and when the game result is hit, the winning stop symbol number is “2”, only the lamp D18 is turned on, and the game result is hit and stopped. When the number is “3”, the lamp D10 and the lamp D18 are turned on.

In addition, the general figure hold display 56 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general figure display 53 by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs.
In the case of the present embodiment, of the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 constituting the general-purpose hold indicator 56, when the hold number is “0”, both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are turned off, and the hold number is “1”. When the hold number is “2”, both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are turned on. When the hold number is “3”, the lamp D15 is blinked and the lamp D16 is turned on. Is turned on, and both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are in a blinking state when the hold number is "4".

The special figure 1 holding display 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, by a plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off, flashing, or turning on.
In the case of this embodiment, among the lamps D11 and D12 constituting the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, when the hold number is “0”, both the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are turned off, and the hold number is “1”. ", The lamp D11 alone is lit, both the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are lit when the hold count is" 2 ", and the lamp D11 is blinked when the hold count is" 3 ". D12 is turned on, and both the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are blinked when the number of holding is “4”. The blinking period is set to 128 milliseconds, for example.

The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 indicates the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting.
In the case of this embodiment, among the lamps D13 and D14 constituting the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, when the hold number is “0”, both the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are turned off, and the hold number is “1”. ”, Only the lamp D13 is lit, when the number of hold is“ 2 ”, both the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are lit, and when the number of hold is“ 3 ”, the lamp D13 is blinked. D14 is turned on, and both the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are in a blinking state when the holding number is “4”. The blinking period is set to 128 milliseconds, for example.

  The first game state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the case of a game state in which left-handed is more advantageous for the player than right-handed (normally hit), a lamp Is turned off, and the lamp is turned on when a right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than a left-handed player (right-handed).

  The second gaming state display unit (time-short state notifying unit) 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the normal gaming state where the time-short state does not occur (when the variable time shortening function is not activated), the lamp is turned on. The lamp is turned off when the time-short state occurs (when the variable time reduction function is activated).

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on. When the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability variation state), the lamp is turned on.

The round display unit 60 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, the lamp is turned off when the game is not in a special game state, and the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed during the special game state. Turn on the light.
In the case of the present embodiment, among the lamp D6, lamp D5, lamp D4, and lamp D3 constituting the round display unit 60, when the selected round number is “4”, the lamp D6 and the lamp D4 are turned on and selected. When the round number is “16”, the lamp D5 and the lamp D3 are turned on.
Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 are awarded, or flow into the outlet 30 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning apparatus 37, or the special variable winning apparatus 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is paid out. From the dispensing unit controlled by 200 (see FIG. 3), the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The memorized number of the usual figure start winnings is displayed on the universal figure holding display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (win random number value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal chart start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual figure change display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a change display portion (common figure display) 53 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 53 is composed of a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the usual figure change display game is a usual figure specifying result, it becomes a hit of the ordinary figure, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 3). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the storage display section (the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the center. Also on the display device 41 of the case 40, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display C.

  The game control device 100 receives the special prize 1 display 51 (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display) based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure variation display game is played on the device. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. And as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode. Further, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the small hit result mode as a result of the special figure change display game, a small hit game state (so-called so-called game condition) , A small hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also the small hit result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is It is to be executed (executed with priority).

  In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable winning device 37) in the state of not being played, in the special game state or in the small hit game state, if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number, The start memory number is incremented by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state, At the end of the small hit gaming state), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch 38a, 39a is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state (short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the starting memory number, etc., and selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. Get. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, Connected to and supplied from the gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, the prize opening switch 35a, the upper count switch 38a of the first special variation winning device 38, and the lower count switch 39a of the second special variation winning device 39. Interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b are provided that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals and sensors of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper count switch 38a, and the lower count switch 39a An abnormality detection signal 1 output when a switch abnormality is detected is input to the second input port 123. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function of removing noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. Data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and is connected to the data bus 140 to open and close the door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 (upper large winning opening solenoid) 38b, and the opening and closing door 39c of the second special variation winning device 39. And a second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. Yes. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the upper prize winning solenoid 38b, the lower prize winning solenoid 39b, and the general power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. Output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a, the second driver 138b, which outputs the segment line on / off drive signal on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the fourth output port 136 External information terminal board for supplying external information signals from the third driver 138c for outputting the digit line on / off drive signal of the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 A fourth driver 138d for outputting to 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining a missed hit of the normal game display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display 53, a processing for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of the normal map change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first per stop symbol to the third per stop symbol is displayed on the general diagram display 53, and the general electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of order, control is performed on the general map display 53 to display the result form of the shift.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode and the small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit. In addition, a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, the CPU 111A opens, for example, the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the upper big prize opening solenoid 38b or the second big prize winning solenoid 39b. Control is performed such that the open / close door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the grand prize winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved, A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a short time state (a specific game state, a general figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state is ended, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to 0 so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal gaming state.

  Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 600 milliseconds. When the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first stop symbol opening time (general power release time) and the number of releases (for example, 500 msec × 1), Opening time (general power opening time) of the second per stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 msec × 2 times), opening time of the third per symbol (opening time of the main power), and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms ×) 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the general map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are appropriately set so as to control the normal map variable display game and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. Probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 7 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, first, the process of prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and a command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 6 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. On the other hand, when the special figure is in a high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, a high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the collective display device 50, for example. Data) is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (per hit random number) After saving to the area (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the winning symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are processed by the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated on the basis of a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) for reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning prize solenoids 38b and 39b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switches 38a and 39a, and an error ( A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) is performed to determine whether the front frame or the glass frame is open. Also, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a panel radio wave fraud that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S114) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the upper count switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower count switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Perform the process.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A10) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval 2 process.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. The fanfare / interval 2 processing (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or an interval 1 process is set Or a special winning opening opening process (step A12) for performing a process of setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “5”, a process for forcibly ending the period for waiting for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged (the big winning opening remaining ball processing period) Then, processing during interval 1 (step A13) is performed for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing fanfare / interval 2 processing.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “7”, in order to perform the process of setting the opening time / opening pattern of the big prize opening, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process when the small hit occurs A small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “8”, a small hitting process (step A16) for setting an ending command and setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. .
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “10”, a small hit end process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and a special figure game process is complete | finished. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning at one start opening (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first start opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is running shortly (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first starting port (start winning port 36) is not left unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not winning unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the first starting port during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (start winning prize opening 36) (step A107), special figure start opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning start monitoring table is prepared for the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the second starting opening. Determine (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the second start opening (step A111; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal variation. If the winning device 37 is activated to determine whether or not the game ball is open (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A113 that there is no fraudulent power transmission (step A113; N), a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, information on no winning of the start target to be monitored among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is obtained. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the big hit random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (ordinary variation winning device 37), information on winning with the start port to be monitored is set (step A126), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is obtained from the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count that is the output count to the external management device is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservation (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure hold to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), update the number of special figure hold to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or number of special figure 2 hold) by +1 ( Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM ( Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the first start opening (step A142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the RWM small hit symbol is selected. Save in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and special figure hold information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A147), a production command setting process (step A148) is performed, and a special figure start opening switch common process is performed. finish.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory is provided. In addition, the start winning storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. And various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 12, first, the start opening prize flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether it is a win for the first start opening (start winning opening 36) (step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first start opening (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153).
In step A153, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that no big hit or small hit is being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit depending on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is corresponded. Stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is a win (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not to the first start opening (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the first start opening is won (step A158; Y), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not. If the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the detachment is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is obtained. (Step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

  Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S166). A167).

  After that, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed on the display device 41, etc., the result related information to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. Can be notified.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit (during a small hit gaming state) (step A201). When the small hit is not being made (step A201; N), it is determined whether the upper prize winning opening (the first special variable winning device 38) is open (step A202).

If the top prize winning opening is not open (step A202; N), it is determined whether the top university winning opening remaining ball valid timer is not "0" (step A203). If the upper large winning opening remaining ball valid timer is “0” (step A203; N), it is determined whether the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is open (step A204).
If the lower major winning opening is not open (step A204; N), it is determined whether the lower major winning opening remaining ball valid timer is not "0" (step A205). When the lower major winning opening remaining ball valid timer is “0” (step A205; N), the process proceeds to step A216.
Further, when the lower prize winning opening is being opened (step A204; Y), or when the lower outstanding prize winning ball remaining timer valid timer is not “0” (step A205; Y), the lower prize winning switch (lower count) It is determined whether there is an input to the switch 39a) (step A206). If there is no input to the lower prize winning switch (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A216. If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch (step A206; Y), a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (step A207), an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed, and the process of step A212 is performed. Migrate to

  Also, when the upper prize winning opening is open (step A202; Y) or when the upper prize winning ball remaining ball valid timer is not "0" (step A203; Y), the upper prize winning switch (up count) It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch 38a) (step A209). If there is no input to the upper prize winning switch (step A209; N), the process proceeds to step A216. If there is an input to the upper prize winning switch (step A209; Y), an upper prize winning count command is prepared (step A210), an effect command setting process (step A211) is performed, and the process of step A212 is performed. Migrate to

In step A212, the winning prize count is updated by +1 (step A212). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of the big winning count is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, “9”) (step A213).
When the number of winning prizes is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A213; N), the process proceeds to step A216. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A213; Y), the special winning mouth count number is kept at the upper limit (step A214), and the special game process timer area is cleared to 0 ( The process proceeds to step A215) and step A216.

In step A216, it is determined whether or not the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 38) is open (step A216).
If the lower major prize opening is open (step A216; Y), the process proceeds to step A220. If the lower university winning opening is not open (step A216; N), if the lower university winning opening remaining ball valid timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A217), and the lower university winning opening remaining ball is reached. It is determined whether the valid timer is “0” (step A218).
If the lower major winning opening remaining ball valid timer is not “0” (step A218; N), the process proceeds to step A220. Further, when the lower prize winning port remaining ball valid timer is “0” (step A218; Y), a signal related to the completion of the lower prize winning opening operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (step A219), and the process proceeds to step A220.

In step A220, it is determined whether or not the top university winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is open (step A202).
If the top prize winning opening is open (step A220; Y), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the upper prize winning opening is not open (step A220; N), if the upper university winning opening remaining ball valid timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A221), and the upper winning prize remaining ball is set. It is determined whether the valid timer is “0” (step A222).
When the upper prize winning port remaining ball valid timer is not “0” (step A222; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the upper prize winning port remaining ball valid timer is “0” (step A222; Y), a signal relating to the completion of the upper prize winning opening operation (for example, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is OFF) is a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (step A223), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

If the small hit is being made (step A201; Y), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is "8", that is, whether the small hit is being processed (step A224).
If it is not under mid-hit processing (step A224; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the small hits are being processed (step A224; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening switch 1 (lower count switch 39a) (step A225).

  When there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step A225; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when there is an input to the prize winning switch 1 (step A225; Y), the value of the prize winning counter is added to the prize winning count (step A226), and the prize winning count is the upper limit (one round). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls that can be won is increased (for example, “9”) or more (step A227).

  When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step A227; N), the special winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or larger than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning mouth count number is kept at the upper limit (step A228), and the special game process timer area is cleared to 0 (step). A229), the value of the end of the small hit release operation is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step A230), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is “0” (step A306). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number is “0” (step A306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A311), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A311). A311; N) sets a customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), an effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. . On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311, (step A311; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In step A301, if the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” (step A301; N), a special figure 2 change start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is executed. A reservation number command is prepared (step A303), and an effect command setting process (step A304) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A305) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.
In step A306, when the special figure 1 hold number is not “0” (step A306; N), a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is executed. A reserve number command is prepared (step A308), and an effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

  As described above, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check. If the special figure 2 hold count is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A302). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A307) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 16, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the shift information and the jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A302) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 17, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A353), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A354). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A355) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a big hit. A small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the loss information is saved in step A351. (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 19 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 20 shows the big hit determination process (steps A154, A355, A374) in the special figure hold information determination process, the big hit flag 1 setting process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is a jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, if the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of place. Therefore, “other than big hit (out of line)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step A383).

  If it is in a high probability state (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). .

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process is terminated. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of place. Then, “other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 21 shows the small hit determination process (steps A159 and A358) in the above-described special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. In other words, “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit judgment lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment upper limit that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to suffer.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), a small hit upper limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (Step A392).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, the small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 22 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A408), and the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts in response to the hit, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes according to the type of winning symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). Also, when a specific big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) in the special figure 1 becomes a special big winning symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol), the transition destination production mode is determined to be certain probability variation depending on whether or not the gaming state is in certain probability variation. It is determined whether to shift to the production mode, which is difficult to distinguish whether it is the production mode or the probability variation. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and if it is a small hit (step A411; Y), the special figure 1 small hit is determined. The small hit design random number is loaded from the design random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern region. Save (step A 417) and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A 418). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A419), and an effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A438), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Further, in the case of this embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, regardless of the big hit symbol, the destination production mode becomes a dedicated production mode in which the probability change is confirmed. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region. (Step A441), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step A442). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A443), and an effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2. The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A334, and A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time) does not affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence / absence of the short time state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 24, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first-half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold count and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table differs depending on whether it is a hit or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of place (step A474). If it is out of place (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed, and step A477 is executed. Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is not out of step (step A474; N), a sorting process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

  Then, the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A477), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1), Prepare (Step A478). Then, a sorting process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). (Step A484). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps A337 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A499), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). ). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Subsequently, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705). (For example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A705; N) as a result of the check of the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and the big hit (step A705). If A706; Y) is determined, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, The special symbol 1 signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “16” or “4”) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. Is saved in the round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and an effect command setting process (step A717) is performed.

  Next, the prize winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with a ball (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and the jackpot without a ball (the so-called sudden hit jackpot. When the information is the big prize opening information 1), it is ON if it is a big hit in the short time state, and is OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit has a ball and is OFF when the big hit has no ball.

  After that, the winning prize opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the ordinary map variation display game and the special map variation display game. It is set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the big prize opening illegal prize number area of the big prize opening (special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39) corresponding to the big prize opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the big prize opening information is cleared. The fraud monitoring non-period monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A726), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A727). ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the special decoration command is loaded from the special decoration command area, prepared (step A729), and the production command is set Processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure has a high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. Thus, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is the game The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the person from being aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A735), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A735). A736) is performed, a remaining switching preparation rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining effect rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738). The remaining number of rotations for preparation for switching may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value in any effect mode of the plurality of effect modes. (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for production and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and production command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is terminated. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched, and the production mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the production control device 300, thereby producing the production across modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring.

[Fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the special figure display mid-process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the fanfare / interval 2 process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval 2 process, is set (step A791). The processing number is saved in (Step A792).

  Next, a signal related to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) (for example, one big hit signal is ON (output with big hit + small hit), and four big hits are ON (output with big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is OFF, special The symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save the ordinary low probability flag in the area (step A797).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state ( In step A799), the special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure change that can be executed in a high probability state The high probability variation frequency area for managing the number of times of the display game is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). . Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is displayed. In order to make it light up, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Fanfare / interval 2 processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval 2 process (step A11) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the fanfare / interval 2 processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). ), An effect command setting process (step A903) is performed.

After that, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is acquired. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), the special winning game opening time for short opening (in this embodiment, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area. (Step A907), the process proceeds to Step A909.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the long opening big winning opening opening time (29 seconds in the present embodiment) is saved in the special game processing timer area. (Step A908), the process proceeds to Step A909.

Here, in this embodiment, as a big hit pattern, (1) 4R, special winning opening release information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, special winning opening release information 2 (all long opening), (3) 16R, special prize opening information 3 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), (4) 4R, special prize opening information 4 (all are long open), (5) 16R, special prize opening is open Information 5 (all open long), (6) 16R, large winning opening information 6 (1-8R is long opening, 9-16R is short opening), (7) 16R, large winning opening information 7 (1-4R) Is long open, and 5-16R is short open).
Therefore, in the big prize opening operation determination table, the big prize opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the big winning opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are the big winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4” in association with each other. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.

In step A909, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is an odd number (step A909). When the number of rounds in the special game state is an odd number (step A909; Y), the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 (in order to open the lower special winning opening 39 (second special variable winning apparatus 39)) Step A910) is performed, and the fanfare / interval 2 processing is terminated. Further, when the number of rounds in the special gaming state is not an odd number (step A909; N), that is, when the number of rounds in the special gaming state is an even number, the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened. Next, the process for setting the transition to the winning prize opening process 2 (step A911) is performed, and the process during the fanfare / interval 2 is completed.
As a result, during the big hit (in the special gaming state), the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are alternately opened every big round. In the case of the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is an odd number, the lower major prize opening (second special variation prize winning device 39) is opened, and when the number of rounds is an even number, the upper major prize opening (first special fluctuation prize). The winning device 38) is opened. However, when the number of rounds is an odd number, the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened, and when the number of rounds is an even number, the lower large winning port ( It is also possible to configure the second special variable winning device 39) to be opened.
In the case of the present embodiment, during the small hit (during the small hit gaming state), only the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is opened (see FIG. 14), but the upper big prize opening (first It is possible to configure so that only the first special variable winning device 38) is opened, or the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 may be alternately opened. .

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 32 shows the process for setting the transition to the process for setting a special winning opening during the fanfare / interval 2 process described above (step A910). In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, the processing number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A921), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A922). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the lower grand prize winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A923). The information in the large winning mouth count number area for storing the winning number to the winning mouth is cleared (step A924). Then, the ON data of the lower major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is saved in the special prize opening solenoid output data area (step A925), and the special prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 33 shows the process for setting the process for setting a special winning opening during the fanfare / interval 2 process transition setting process 2 (step A911). In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A 931), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A932). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the upper prize winning opening (the first special variable prize winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A933). The information in the large winning mouth count area storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step A934). Then, the ON data of the upper prize winning opening (the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) is saved in the large winning prize opening solenoid output data area (step A935), and the special winning opening releasing process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the special prize opening opening process, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), it is determined whether the current round is an odd number (step A1002).

When the current round is an odd number round (step A1002; Y), the initial valid time (2.5 seconds in this embodiment) is saved in the lower major winning opening remaining ball valid timer area (step A1003). ), 1 hour interval for long closing (in the case of this embodiment, 0.296 seconds) is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A1004), and processing transition setting processing during interval 1 (step A1007) is performed. Then, the process for opening the big prize opening is finished.
If the current round is not an odd land (step A1002; N), that is, if the current round is an even round, the effective time initial value (in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds) is saved (step A1005), and an interval 1 hour for short closing (in this embodiment, 0.096 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1006). The middle process transition setting process (step A1007) is performed, and the special winning opening opening process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), an ending command corresponding to the special winning opening release information is prepared (step A1008), and an effect command setting process (step A1009) is performed.
Next, the initial valid time (2.5 seconds in the case of this embodiment) is saved in the upper prize winning ball remaining timer effective timer area (step A1010), and the ending time corresponding to the special winning opening information (this implementation). In the case of the form, for example, it is 5.1 seconds for the special prize opening information 1, 12.0 seconds for the special prize opening information 2 and 5, and 5 for the special prize opening information 3, 4 and 7. 3 seconds, 14.1 seconds if the big prize opening information is 6) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1011), the big hit end process transition setting process (step A1012) is performed, and the big prize opening Terminate the process during opening.

[Interval 1 transition process setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the process transition setting process (step A1007) during interval 1 in the above-described process during opening of the special winning opening. In this interval 1 process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “5” related to the process during interval 1 (step A1021), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1022). . Then, in order to close the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 or the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the upper large winning port solenoid 38b or the lower large winning port solenoid 39b is turned off. The data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the process transition setting process during the interval 1 is terminated.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A1012) in the above-described process for opening the big prize opening. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A1031), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1032). After that, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, off data for turning off the upper prize winning solenoid 38b is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step A1033).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step A1034), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1035). ), Information on the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1036). Then, the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the round number upper limit value determination flag is cleared (step A1037), and the big winning opening opening information area storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A1038), and the jackpot end process transition setting process ends.

[Processing during interval 1]
Next, details of the process during interval 1 (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the processing during interval 1, it is first determined whether or not the current round is an odd-numbered round (step A1101).
If the current round is an odd number round (step A1101; Y), the upper prize winning port remaining ball valid timer is cleared to 0 (step A1102), and the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 2 (step A1104) is performed. Then, the processing during interval 1 is completed.
On the other hand, if the current round is not an odd number round (step A1101; N), that is, if the current round is an even number round, the lower winning prize remaining ball valid timer is cleared to 0 (step A1103), and the fanfare / interval 2 The middle process transition setting process 2 (step A1104) is performed, and the process during the interval 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / interval 2 transition process setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 2 (step A1104) in the mid-interval 1 process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 2, first, “3” is set as the process number related to the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process (step A1111). Save in the process number area (step A1112).
Next, an interval of 2 hours (0.004 seconds in the case of this embodiment) is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1113), and the fanfare / interval 2 transition process setting process 2 is terminated.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201).
If it is not the short-time operation data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is the short-time operation data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step A903). . Then, the production mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the production mode transition information set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as processing for saving the information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and an effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in any of “high probability / with time reduction” and “high probability / without time reduction”. In the case of the present embodiment, the probabilistic state is always obtained when the big hit ends (so-called ST state). , “High probability / short time / direction mode C” and “High probability / no time / direction mode A” are not used in this process, but “low probability / no time / direction mode A”, “ There are “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode B” and “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode C”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and an effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), and an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed to determine whether or not a short-time state occurs after the big hit ends (step A1216). .
When the short time state occurs after the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the big hit end process is ended.
Further, when the time-short state does not occur after the big hit (Step A1216; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (Step A1217), and after performing the effect command setting process (Step A1218), the special figure normal process transition is performed. A setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the jackpot end process ends.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 40 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above jackpot end process. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the absence of the time-saving state (for example, 2 signals of the big hit) are saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal related to the start of the high-probability state and the absence of the time-saving state (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF. The status signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

  Next, a number without a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1223), a common low probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & no short time flag is saved (step A1225). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (step A1226), and a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227), in order to extinguish the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 57), the number of the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the jackpot end setting process 1 Exit.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 41 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time-saving state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). Since the signal related to the start of the short-time state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

  Next, the number with the short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the common figure high probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & short time flag is saved (step A1235). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation frequency area (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the short-time state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the setting for the right-handed end setting process 2 is not performed.

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
FIG. 42 shows special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the big hit end process described above. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242). .

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is OFF, 3 signals for the big hit is OFF, and 4 signals for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The condition device operating signal OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, the special symbol 1 signal OFF, and the special symbol 2 signal OFF are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1248), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. Exit.

Here, forcible termination of the big winning opening remaining ball processing period (period for waiting for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged), which is a feature of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described.
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes two large winning openings, an upper prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) and a lower large winning prize opening (second special variable winning prize apparatus 39). The big prize opening is configured to open alternately every round (big hit round). In other words, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment uses both of the two big winning holes in one special gaming state, and different big winning holes corresponding to the round update in the special gaming state. Is converted to an open state.

That is, the first special variation winning device 38 is a first variable winning device that can convert between a closed state and an open state in response to execution of a special game (a game that gives a special game state), and a second special variation. The winning device 39 is a second variable winning device that can convert between a closed state and an open state in response to the execution of the special game.
The upper count switch 38a serves as first game ball detecting means for detecting a game ball flowing into the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38), and the lower count switch 39a is used as the second variable winning device. It constitutes a second game ball detecting means for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the (second special variation winning device 39).
In addition, the game control device 100 controls the conversion between the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) in the special game. Make.
The special game consists of a predetermined number of rounds, and the winning device control means (game control device 100) converts the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) into the open state and the second variable winning. Conversion to the open state of the device (second special variable winning device 39) is performed alternately for each round.

If there are two big prize openings and one big prize opening and the other big prize opening are alternately opened, when the opening of one big prize opening ends, the remaining balls in the one big prize opening are discharged. In order to wait for the winning prize remaining ball processing period to be set, the other winning prize opening is opened during the winning prize remaining ball processing period for one of the winning prize openings. In this case, if the other big prize opening is closed in a short time, the opening of the other big prize opening ends and the one big prize winning is completed before the big prize opening remaining ball processing period for one big prize opening passes. Mouth may be converted to open. In other words, the current round may end and the next round may start before the last winning ball remaining ball processing period of the previous round elapses. In this case, a game ball won in the next round is detected in the last winning ball remaining ball processing period of the previous round, and may not be detected in an appropriate round (that is, the next round). It is not preferable as a specification.
On the other hand, even if the other big prize opening closes in a short time and the opening of the other big prize opening ends before the big prize opening remaining ball processing period for one big prize opening expires, If it is configured such that one of the big winning openings is converted to the open state after the mouth remaining ball processing period has elapsed (finished), it does not occur when the game balls won in the big winning opening are not detected in an appropriate round. However, in this case, after the other special winning opening is converted to the closed state, after waiting for the passage of the outstanding winning opening remaining ball processing period for the one special winning opening, the one special winning opening is converted to the open state. Therefore, it is not possible to smoothly convert the big winning mouth.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the other big prize opening is closed in a short time, and the opening of the other big prize opening ends before the big prize opening remaining ball processing period for one big prize opening passes, The large winning opening remaining ball processing period is forcibly terminated and one large winning opening is converted into an open state. As a result, it is possible to detect the game balls that have won the big winning opening in an appropriate round and to smoothly convert the big winning opening.
In other words, the winning device control means (game control device 100) changes one of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39). After the effective period for the winning device (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) ends, the one variable winning device is converted to an open state.

In this embodiment, the winning ball remaining ball processing period for the upper winning hole is timed by the upper winning hole remaining ball valid timer, and the remaining winning ball processing period for the lower winning hole is the lower winning hole remaining time. Timed by a ball valid timer. Accordingly, when the upper prize winning ball remaining timer valid timer becomes “0”, the big winning prize remaining ball processing period for the upper prize winning gate ends, and when the lower outstanding prize winning ball remaining timer becomes “0”, The large winning opening remaining ball processing period for the winning opening ends.
Then, the winning prize remaining ball processing period for the upper winning prize opening is a step A1102 (that is, a process of clearing the upper winning prize remaining ball valid timer to 0) during the interval 1 process (see FIG. 37) in the special game process. It is forcibly terminated at.
In addition, during the interval 1 in the special game process (see FIG. 37), step A1103 (that is, the process of clearing the bottom large winning opening remaining ball valid timer to 0) is performed during the large winning opening remaining ball processing period for the lower large winning opening. It is forcibly terminated at.

When the other big prize opening (for example, the lower big prize opening) is closed in a short time, when the process shifts to the processing during the interval 1, the big winning opening remaining ball process for one of the big prize winning holes (for example, the upper big prize opening) Since the period has not expired, the remaining ball valid timer (for example, the upper prize winning ball remaining timer valid timer) of one of the large prize winning openings is not “0”. Therefore, the game control device 100 forcibly terminates the winning ball remaining ball processing period for one of the big winning ports by clearing the remaining ball valid timer of one of the big winning ports to 0 in the interval 1 process.
Here, in the present embodiment, “when the other big prize opening is closed in a short time” means, for example, the big prize opening opening time for short opening (for example, 0.2. Seconds), or a long winning big opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set as the opening time of the other big winning opening, and the remaining winning ball processing of the big winning opening for one of the big winning openings is set. This is the case when the upper limit number (for example, 9) of game balls wins the other big winning opening before the period ends.

If the other winning a prize opening is not closed in a short period of time, the process of the one winning prize remaining ball processing period for the one winning award has ended at the time of shifting to the processing during interval 1, so The remaining ball effective timer of the mouth is “0”, and it is not necessary to clear the remaining ball effective timer of one of the winning prize ports to 0 in the processing during the interval 1, but in this embodiment, the remaining ball effective timer is From the viewpoint of surely setting “0”, reducing the processing load (specifically, omitting the process of determining whether the remaining ball valid timer is already “0”), etc. At the time of transfer, regardless of whether or not the remaining ball valid timer of one large winning opening is already “0”, the remaining ball valid timer of one large winning opening is cleared to zero.
Here, in the present embodiment, “when the other big prize opening does not close in a short time” means, for example, that the big prize opening opening time for long opening is set as the opening time of the other big prize opening, When the opening time of the big winning opening for the long opening is completed (that is, when the upper limit number of game balls has not been won by the other winning opening before the opening time of the large winning opening for the long opening) The opening time of the large winning opening for the long opening is set as the opening time of the other large winning opening, and the large winning opening for the long opening after the large winning opening remaining ball processing period for the one winning opening ends. This is the case, for example, when an upper limit number of game balls have been won in the other big prize opening before the opening time elapses.

43 and 44 are timing charts for explaining an example of the operation during the big hit (special game state) in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
FIG. 43 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the case where the other special winning opening is not closed in a short time.
Specifically, FIG. 43 shows (2) 16R, special winning opening release information 2 (all long opening), (5) 16R, special winning opening release information 5 (all long opening), and (6) ) When 16R or any of the big winning opening information 6 (1-8R is long opening, 9-16R is short opening) is set, and the big opening opening time is satisfied in each round ( That is, it is a timing chart for explaining an example of a case where the upper limit number of game balls have not won before the big winning opening opening time elapses.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43, first, the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit (special result), and the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process is terminated, and the fanfare / interval 2 intermediate process (step) When A11) starts, a fanfare for notifying the occurrence of a big hit (special game state) starts. In the case of the present embodiment, the special gaming state is a gaming state in which right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. Therefore, the firing position that is turned on when right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed The designation signal 1 is turned ON from the start of the special gaming state (that is, fanfare start) to the end of the special gaming state (that is, ending end).

  Next, when the big prize opening opening process in the special game process is started (step A12), the first round (1R) starts and the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is opened (long open). ) In the case of the present embodiment, the opening time for the large winning opening for long opening is 29 seconds (see step A908). Therefore, the condition that 29 seconds elapse after the lower winning opening is converted to the open state and the lower winning prize The lower large winning opening is kept open until either one of the conditions that the upper limit number of game balls wins is achieved. In this example, the lower major prize opening is opened until the condition that 29 seconds elapses after the lower major prize opening is converted to the open state, and the lower major prize opening is closed based on the achievement of the condition. Has been converted.

  Next, when 0.3 second has elapsed after the lower major winning opening is converted to the closed state and the large winning opening opening process (step A12) in the special game process is started, the second round (2R) is started. Thus, the upper university winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened (long open). In the case of the present embodiment, since the opening time for the long opening big winning opening is 29 seconds (see step A908), the condition that 29 seconds elapse after the upper winning opening is converted to the open state and the upper winning prize The upper prize winning opening is kept open until either one of the conditions that the upper limit number of game balls wins is achieved. In this example, the upper university prize opening is opened until the condition that 29 seconds elapses after the upper university prize opening is converted to the open state, and the upper university prize opening is closed based on the achievement of the condition. Has been converted.

  From the end of the process during the opening of the big prize opening in the first round (conversion to the closed state of the lower prize opening) to the start of the process during the opening of the big winning opening in the second round (conversion to the open state of the upper prize opening) ) During the interval 1 (step A13) and the fanfare / interval 2 processing (step A11) in the special figure game processing are performed. In the present embodiment, the current round is an odd number round. The interval 1 hour set in this case is 0.296 seconds (see step A1004), and the interval 2 hours set regardless of whether the current round is an odd round is 0.004 seconds (see step A1113). Therefore, when 0.3 seconds (= 0.296 seconds + 0.004 seconds) have elapsed since the lower major prize opening was converted to the closed state, the upper major prize opening changed to the open state. It is.

In addition to the conversion of the lower prize winning opening to the closed state, timing by the lower prize winning opening remaining ball valid timer is started (that is, the timing of the remaining winning ball remaining ball processing period for the lower prize winning opening). The initial valid time saved in the lower great winning opening remaining ball valid timer area is 2.5 seconds (see step A1003). Therefore, when 2.5 seconds have elapsed since the lower major winning opening was converted to the closed state, the major winning opening remaining ball processing period for the lower major winning opening ends.
In addition, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal that is turned on while the detection of the lower major prize opening count switch (lower count switch 39a) is valid is the lower major prize winning after the lower major prize opening is converted to the open state. It is turned ON until the end of the winning ball remaining ball processing period for the mouth.

Next, when 0.1 second elapses after the top prize winning opening is converted to the closed state and the big winning opening releasing process (step A12) in the special game process is started, the third round (3R) starts. As a result, the lower grand prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened (long open).
From the end of the process during opening of the big prize opening in the second round (conversion to the closed state of the upper prize opening) to the start of processing during opening of the big prize opening in the third round (conversion to the open state of the lower prize opening) ) During the interval 1 (step A13) and the fanfare / interval 2 processing (step A11) in the special figure game processing are performed. In the present embodiment, the current round is an even number round. The interval 1 hour set in this case is 0.096 seconds (see step A1006), and the interval 2 hours set is 0.004 seconds (see step A1113 regardless of whether or not the current round is an even-numbered round). Therefore, the lower prize winning opening is changed to the open state when 0.1 second (= 0.096 seconds + 0.004 seconds) has elapsed since the upper winning prize opening is converted to the closed state. It is.

In addition to the conversion to the closed state of the upper prize winning opening, timing by the upper winning prize remaining ball valid timer is started (that is, the time measurement of the outstanding winning opening remaining ball processing period for the upper prize winning opening) is started. The initial valid time saved in the upper prize winning port remaining ball valid timer area is 2.5 seconds (see step A1005). Accordingly, when 2.5 seconds elapses after the upper prize winning opening is converted to the closed state, the big winning prize remaining ball processing period for the upper prize winning opening ends.
In addition, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal that is turned on while the detection of the upper prize winning count switch (upper count switch 38a) is valid is the upper prize winning after the upper prize winning opening is converted to the open state. It is turned ON until the end of the winning ball remaining ball processing period for the mouth.
After the third round, operations similar to those in the first round and operations similar to those in the second round are alternately performed.

In other words, the game control device 100 performs a predetermined time (this embodiment) after the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) or the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted to the closed state. In the case of the embodiment, effective period setting means for setting the period until 2.5 seconds) as the effective period (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) is set.
Further, the game control device 100 serves as conversion condition determination means for determining whether or not the open state conversion condition of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the second special variable winning device 39 is converted to the closed state, that is, the time set as the opening time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.2 seconds) of the second special variable winning device 39. When the time has elapsed, or when an upper limit number (for example, 9) of game balls has won the second special variable winning device 39 until the time set as the opening time of the second special variable winning device 39 has elapsed. Then, it is determined that the open state conversion condition of the first special variation winning device 38 is satisfied.
In addition, the winning device control means (game control device 100) is determined by the conversion condition determining means (game control device 100) that the open state conversion condition of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is satisfied. In this case, the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is converted to an open state.

Further, the game control device 100 serves as conversion condition determination means for determining whether or not the open state conversion condition of the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the first special variable winning device 38 is converted to the closed state, that is, the time set as the opening time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.2 seconds) of the first special variable winning device 38. When the time has elapsed, or when the upper limit number (for example, nine) of game balls has won the first special variable winning device 38 before the time set as the opening time of the first special variable winning device 38 has elapsed. Then, it is determined that the open state conversion condition of the second special fluctuation winning device 39 is satisfied.
In addition, the winning device control means (game control device 100) is determined by the conversion condition determination means (game control device 100) that the open state conversion condition of the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is satisfied. In this case, the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted to the open state.

FIG. 44 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the case where the other prize winning opening (in this example, the upper prize winning opening) is closed in a short time.
In the example shown in FIG. 44, in the second round (2R), the upper limit number (9 in the case of this embodiment) of game balls won in the upper grand prize winning opening in one second, that is, the first round (1R) The maximum number of games that can be opened in the second round before the remaining winning ball processing period for the big winning opening (ie, the lower winning prize opening) has passed in the second round (ie, the upper winning prize opening). The example is the same as the example shown in FIG. 43 except that the ball is won. Therefore, mainly different parts will be described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44, the maximum number of game balls won in the second round (2R) in the second round (2R) (that is, the upper major prize opening) in one second. The mouth open process is completed in 1 second. Therefore, normally, when 2.5 seconds have passed after the lower major winning opening is converted to the closed state, the extra winning opening remaining ball processing period for the lower major winning opening ends. 1.3 seconds after conversion to the closed state (= 0.296 seconds (odd round (for long closing) interval 1 hour) + 0.004 seconds (interval 2 hours) + 1 second (processing time during opening of the big prize opening) )) Elapses, the winning prize remaining ball processing period for the lower winning prize opening is forcibly terminated (that is, the lower winning prize remaining ball valid timer area is cleared to 0 (see step A1103)). Here, in this embodiment, “forcibly ending the winning ball remaining ball processing period” means that the remaining ball effective timer area is cleared to 0 while the remaining ball effective timer is not “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, the “large winning opening remaining ball processing period” is a period in which the remaining ball valid timer is not “0”.

  In other words, the valid period setting means (game control device 100) determines the valid period (large winning opening remaining ball) for the second variable winning device when the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted to the closed state. Processing period), and before the predetermined time (in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds) elapses, the conversion condition determination means (game control device 100) causes the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39). If the open state conversion condition is determined to be satisfied, the set valid period is terminated (forced termination) without waiting for the predetermined time to elapse.

Then, the upper prize winning opening is converted to the closed state (that is, the big winning opening remaining ball processing period for the lower winning prize opening is forcibly terminated) for 0.1 second (= 0.096 seconds (for even round (short closing)). ) (Interval 1 hour) +0.004 seconds (interval 2 hours)) has elapsed, the third round (3R) starts and the lower major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is opened ( Long open). As a result, it is possible to detect the game ball that has won the lower major prize opening in an appropriate round, since there is no loss of the upper prize opening remaining ball processing period for the lower major prize opening and the opening of the lower major prize opening. It becomes possible, and it is possible to smoothly convert the big winning opening.
That is, the winning device control means (game control device 100) is determined by the conversion condition determining means (game control device 100) that the open state conversion condition of the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is satisfied. A predetermined period from the point in time (interval period. In this embodiment, 0.1 second (= 0.096 second (interval 1 hour for even round (short closing)) + 0.004 second (interval 2 hours))) After the elapse of time, the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted to the open state.
In addition, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal that is turned on while the detection of the lower major prize opening count switch (lower count switch 39a) is valid forcibly ends the extra prize winning ball remaining ball processing period for the lower major prize opening. Since it is turned off in step A219 of the big prize opening switch monitoring process (see FIG. 13) executed after the interval 1 process (see FIG. 37), 1.396 after the lower big prize opening is converted to the closed state. It is turned OFF when seconds (= 1.3 seconds (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) +0.096 seconds (interval 1 hour for even round (short closing))) have elapsed.
Therefore, during the period in which the detection of the lower count switch 39a is valid (that is, the ON period of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal), if the large winning port remaining ball processing period for the lower large winning port is not forcibly terminated, “ (The period during which the lower prize winning opening is open) + (the remaining prize ball processing period for the lower prize winning opening) ”, but the remaining big ball processing period for the lower prize winning opening is forcibly terminated Is “(period in which the lower prize winning opening is open) + (large winning prize remaining ball processing period for the lower prize winning opening) + (interval 1 hour for even round (short closing))”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44, since the upper limit number of game balls won in the second round at the upper prize opening in one second, the big prize for the big prize opening opened in the first round (that is, the lower big prize opening). Although the mouth remaining ball processing period is “1.3 seconds”, in the case of this embodiment, the length T1 of the large winning port remaining ball processing period with respect to the lower prize opening is the opening time of the upper university winning mouth. If it is less than 2.2 seconds, 0.3 seconds (= 0.296 seconds (odd round (long closing) interval 1 hour) + 0.004 seconds (interval 2 hours)) depending on the opening time If the opening time is arbitrarily changed in the range of <T1 <2.5 seconds and the opening time is 2.2 seconds or more, T1 = 2.5 seconds regardless of the opening time. In the case of the present embodiment, since the opening time for the large winning opening for short opening is 0.2 seconds, the upper number of upper winning holes is set to the upper limit before the winning ball remaining ball processing period for the lower winning hole has elapsed. Not only when the game ball of the game is won, but also when the opening of the upper prize winning opening is short, the upper winning prize opening will be closed before the remaining winning ball processing period for the lower winning prize is over. The winning ball remaining ball processing period for the lower winning port is forcibly terminated (that is, T1 <2.5 seconds).

Of course, the winning ball remaining ball processing period for the upper winning ball can also be forcibly terminated. In other words, if the upper limit number of game balls are won in the lower prize opening before the upper prize opening remaining ball processing period for the upper prize winning gate elapses, the remaining prize ball processing period for the upper prize opening is mandatory. The process ends (that is, the upper prize winning port remaining ball effective timer area is cleared to 0 (see step A1102)).
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the length T2 of the outstanding winning opening remaining ball processing period for the upper winning opening is the opening time when the opening time of the lower winning opening is less than 2.4 seconds. 0.1 seconds (= 0.096 seconds (interval 1 hour for even round (short closing)) + 0.004 seconds (interval 2 hours)) <T2 <2.5 seconds If the opening time is changed to 2.4 seconds or longer, T2 = 2.5 seconds regardless of the opening time. In the case of the present embodiment, since the opening time for the large winning opening for short opening is 0.2 seconds, the upper limit of the number of lower winning holes before the upper winning hole remaining ball processing period elapses for the upper winning hole. Not only when the game ball of the game is won, but also when the opening of the lower prize winning opening is short, the lower prize winning opening will be closed before the remaining winning ball processing period for the upper winning prize is over The winning ball remaining ball processing period for the upper winning ball is forcibly terminated (that is, T2 <2.5 seconds).

In other words, the effective period setting means (game control device 100) determines the effective period (large winning opening remaining ball) for the first variable winning device when the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is converted to the closed state. Processing period), and before the predetermined time (in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds) elapses, the conversion condition determination means (game control device 100) performs the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38). If the open state conversion condition is determined to be satisfied, the set valid period is terminated (forced termination) without waiting for the predetermined time to elapse.
In addition, the winning device control means (game control device 100) is determined by the conversion condition determining means (game control device 100) that the open state conversion condition of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is satisfied. A predetermined period from the point in time (interval period. In this embodiment, 0.3 seconds (= 0.296 seconds (interval 1 hour for odd round (long closing)) + 0.004 seconds (interval 2 hours))) After the elapse of time, the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is converted to the open state.

  Next, control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control apparatus 300 will be described. The control process by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes a main process shown in FIG. 45 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 45, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), the CPU is initialized (step C2), the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). .
Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7).

In this main process, next, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8).
Next, an effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect operation unit (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) is performed. The input from the production operation unit is read in the timer interruption process. In this production button input process, when there is an input from the production operation unit, a process for changing the production content is performed.
Next, hall / player setting mode processing (step C10) is performed for accepting operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player.
Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.
Next, a received command check process (step C12) is performed in which a command from the game control device 100 is analyzed and a response is made.
Next, scenario setting processing (step C13) and motion control processing (step C14) are performed.

Next, an effect display editing process (step C15) is performed, and a drawing command preparation end is set (step C16). In the effect display editing process, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.
Next, it is determined whether it is a frame switching timing (step C17). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching).
If it is determined in step C17 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C17; N), the process of step C17 is repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C17 that it is the frame switching timing (step C17; Y), a screen drawing is instructed (step C18).

  Next, a sound control process (step C19) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b), a decoration control process (step C20) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 ), A movable body control process (step C21) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board rendering device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process for clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (step C12) in the above-described main process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 46, in the received command check process, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of received commands (see FIG. 46). Step C31).
Next, it is determined whether or not the command reception number is not “0” (step C32).
If it is determined in step C32 that the command reception number is “0” (step C32; N), the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C32 that the number of received commands is not “0” (step C32; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C33).
Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C34), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “31” (step C35), and the command is copied for the number of received commands. It is determined whether or not it is completed (step C36). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.
If it is determined in step C36 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C36; N), the process returns to step C34.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C36 that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C36; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C37), and the received command analysis process (step C38). )I do.
Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C39), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C40).
If it is determined in step C40 that the command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C40; N), the process returns to step C37.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C40 that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C40; Y), the received command check process is terminated.
As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step C38) in the received command check process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 47, in the received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C51).
Next, it is determined whether or not MODE is within a normal range (step C52).
If it is determined in step C52 that MODE is in the normal range (step C52; Y), it is determined whether or not ACT is in the normal range (step C53).
If it is determined in step C53 that the ACT is in the normal range (step C53; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C54).

Further, if it is determined in step C52 that MODE is not in the normal range (step C52; N), if it is determined in step C53 that ACT is not in the normal range (step C53; N), or in step C54, the response to the MOED If it is determined that ACT is not a correct combination (step C54; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.
If it is determined in step C54 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C54; Y), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C55).
If it is determined in step C55 that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C55; Y), the variable command process (step C56) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C55 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C55; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C57).
If it is determined in step C57 that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C57; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C58) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C57 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot command (step C57; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol system command (step C59).
If it is determined in step C59 that MODE is within the range of symbolic commands (step C59; Y), symbolic command processing (step C60) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C59 that MODE is not in the range of symbol-related commands (step C59; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command or an error command. (Step C61).
If it is determined in step C61 that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C61; Y), single command processing (step C62) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C61 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (step C61; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C63).
If it is determined in step C63 that MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C63; Y), pre-read symbol command processing (step C64) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C63 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetched symbol system command (step C63; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the prefetching variation system command (step C65).
If it is determined in step C65 that MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C65; Y), the prefetch variation command processing (step C66) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C65 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching variation command (step C65; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command process (step C56) in the received command analysis process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 48, in the variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the type of the special figure variable display game is unconfirmed (step C71). This determination makes it possible to check whether a stop symbol command has been received before receiving the variation pattern command. Since the stop symbol command includes information on the type of the special symbol fluctuation display game (whether it is special graph 1 or special graph 2), if the stop symbol command can be received normally, the special symbol variation display game It is determined that the type of is not yet determined.
When it is determined in step C71 that the type of the special figure variation display game is unconfirmed (step C71; Y), the variation command processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step C71 that the type of the special figure variation display game is not yet determined (step C71; N), a variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step C72) is performed. In this variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the type of stop symbol command matches (matches) the variation pattern command. Thus, for example, when the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command type do not match, such as a combination of a variation pattern command of hit variation and a stop symbol command of the off symbol, it does not vary (specifically (Do not play the decoration special figure fluctuation display game).

If the result of determination in step C72 is that the variation pattern command and stop symbol command type do not match (step C73; Y), the variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if the result of determination in step C72 is that the variation pattern command and stop symbol command type match (step C73; N), the variation effect setting processing (step C74) is performed, and the variation command processing is terminated. To do.

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, the details of the changing effect setting process (step C74) in the above-described changing command process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 49, in the variation effect setting process, the effect control device 300 first performs the variation pattern classification process (step C81), clears all the notice information area (step C82), and the first half change notice lottery. Processing (step C83) is performed.
Next, as a result of the classification in step C81, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command is roughly classified into a variation pattern with no reach variation (step C84).

If it is determined in step C84 that the variation pattern of the variation without reach is roughly divided (step C84; Y), the process proceeds to step C86.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C84 that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation without reach is not roughly divided (step C84; N), that is, if the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern of fluctuation with reach, the latter half fluctuation. The middle notice lottery process (step C85) is performed, and the process proceeds to step C86.
In Step C86, a decoration stop symbol setting process (Step C86) is performed, and thereafter, a variation start setting process (Step C87) is performed, and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

[First half lottery notice lottery processing]
Next, the details of the first-variation preliminary notice lottery process (step C83) in the above-described variable effect setting process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 50, in the first half change notice lottery process, the effect control device 300 first sets the first half notice group table 1 corresponding to the type of change pattern, the effect mode, and the like (step C101).

Next, a notice group lottery process A (step C102) is performed in which a lottery for selecting a notice group for a notice effect at the start of change is selected.
If “no notice” is selected as a result of the lottery in step C102 (step C103; Y), information related to “no notice” is stored as normal performance information of the notice effect at the start of change, and the process of step C105 is performed. Migrate to

  On the other hand, if a result other than “No notice” is selected as a result of the lottery in step C102 (step C103; N), the variation from the normal notice pattern included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step C102 is changed. A detailed notice lottery process A (step C104) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice pattern to appear at the start is performed, and information on the selected notice pattern is stored as normal effect information of the notice effect at the start of change. Transition to processing.

In step C105, the first half notice group table 2 corresponding to the type of variation pattern and the production mode is set (step C105).
Next, a notice group lottery process B (step C106) is performed in which a lottery for selecting a notice group for a pre-reach notice effect is performed.
As a result of the lottery in step C106, when “no notice” is selected (step C107; Y), information regarding “no notice” is stored as normal performance information of the pre-reach notice effect, and the notice lottery during the first half change The process ends.

  On the other hand, when a result other than “No notice” is selected as a result of the lottery in step C106 (step C107; N), reach is selected from the normal notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step C106. Advance notice lottery processing B (step C108) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice pattern to appear before is performed, and information on the selected notice pattern is stored as normal performance information of the pre-reach notice effect. The lottery process is terminated.

[Lottery processing during the latter half of the change]
Next, details of the latter-half fluctuation notice lottery process (step C85) in the above-described fluctuation effect setting process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 51, in the latter-half change notice lottery process, the effect control device 300 first sets the latter-order notice group table 1 corresponding to the type of change pattern, the effect mode, and the like (step C111).

Next, a notice group lottery process C (step C112) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice group for a notice effect during reach is performed.
As a result of the lottery in step C112, when “no notice” is selected (step C113; Y), information related to “no notice” is stored as normal performance information of the notice effect during reach, and the process of step C115 is performed. Transition.

  On the other hand, if the result of the lottery in step C112 is other than “no notice” (step C113; N), the reach is selected from the normal notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step C112. A detailed notice lottery process C (step C114) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice pattern to appear inside is performed, information about the selected notice pattern is stored as normal effect information for the notice effect during reach, and the process of step C115 Migrate to

In Step C115, the latter half notice group table 2 corresponding to the type of variation pattern, the production mode, etc. is set (Step C115).
Next, a notice group lottery process D (step C116) is performed in which a lottery for selecting a notice group for the notice effect after reach is selected.
As a result of the lottery in step C116, when “no notice” is selected (step C117; Y), information related to “no notice” is stored as normal performance information of the notice announcement after reach, and the notice lottery during the latter half of the change The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the result of the lottery in step C116 is other than “no notice” (step C117; N), reach is selected from the normal notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step C116. Detailed notice lottery processing D (step C118) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice pattern to be displayed later is performed, and information on the selected notice pattern is stored as normal effect information of the notice effect after reach, and the latter half is changing. The notice lottery process ends.

In this embodiment, it is configured that the notice group lottery process is performed twice assuming that there are two notice timings (at the start of change, before reach) during the first half fluctuation, but the number of notice timings during the first half fluctuation is However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be one time or three or more times. In addition, the number of executions of the notice group lottery process can be arbitrarily changed according to the number of notice timings during the first half change.
Similarly, in this embodiment, it is configured that the notice group lottery process is performed twice assuming that there are two notice timings (during reach and after reach) during the latter half of the change, but the number of notice timings during the latter half of the change is However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be one time or three or more times. In addition, the number of executions of the notice group lottery process can be arbitrarily changed according to the number of notice timings during the latter half of the change.

50, the notice group lottery process is performed twice, and in the previous notice group lottery process (that is, the notice group lottery process A (step C102)), “the notice effect at the start of change” is performed. The “notice group” is selected and the “notice group for pre-reach notice effect” is selected in the subsequent notice group lottery process (ie, the notice group lottery process B (step C106)). It is also possible to configure the system so that “notice group of notice effect at start of change” and “notice group of notice effect before reach” are selected in the notice group lottery process.
Similarly, in the second-half fluctuation notice lottery process in FIG. 51, the notice group lottery process is performed twice, and the previous notice group lottery process (that is, the notice group lottery process C (step C112)) is executed. The “notice group” is selected, and the “notice group for the post-reach notice effect” is selected in the subsequent notice group lottery process (that is, the notice group lottery process D (step C116)). It is also possible to perform only once, and in the notice group lottery process, select “notice group for notice effect during reach” and “notice group for notice effect after reach”.
In addition, instead of the first-half variable notice lottery process and the second-half variable notice lottery process, the notice group lottery process is performed only once. It is also possible to perform a floating notice lottery process for selecting a notice group for a notice effect, a notice group for a notice effect during reach, and a notice group for a notice effect after reach.

As in the present embodiment, lottery effects can be executed even with a small amount of memory usage by performing lottery at every notice timing. For example, in the case where “notice group of notice effect at start of change” and “notice group of notice effect before reach” are selected in two lotteries as in the present embodiment, the notice group table used in the two lotteries is selected. As the storage area, an area corresponding to “the number of notice groups of the notice effect at the start of change” + “the number of notice groups of the notice effect before the reach” is required. On the other hand, when selecting “Advance notice group at the start of change” and “Advance notice group at the start of reach” in one lottery, “Advance notice group at the start of change” in the one lottery. One combination is selected from the notice group table that stores a plurality of combinations of "Pre-reach notice notice group". Therefore, the storage area of the notice group table used in the one lottery needs an area corresponding to “the number of notice groups of the notice effect at the start of change” × “the number of notice groups of the notice effect before the reach” × As the number of timings and the number of notice groups increase, the required area increases, so the memory usage increases. For this reason, it is preferable to perform the notice group lottery process at each notice timing from the viewpoint of reducing the memory usage.
On the other hand, by configuring a plurality of notice groups in one lottery, a large number of notice effects can be executed even with a small number of lotteries. That is, from the viewpoint of reducing the number of lotteries, it is preferable to select a plurality of notice groups in one notice group lottery process.

[Scenario setting process]
Next, details of the scenario setting process (step C13) in the above-described main process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 52, in the scenario setting process, first, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared (step C201), and the scenario analysis process ( Step C202) is executed. Here, “preparing an address area” means preparing an address of the address area itself in order to read data set in the address area in a later process.

Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared (step C203), and scenario analysis processing (step C204) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared (step C205), and scenario analysis processing (step C206) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared (step C207), and scenario analysis processing (step C208) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared (step C209), and scenario analysis processing (step C210) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared (step C211), and scenario analysis processing (step C212) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared (step C213), and scenario analysis processing (step C214) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 7 (scenario layer number 7) is prepared (step C215), and the scenario analysis process (step C216) is executed based on this preparation, finish.

  In this embodiment, there are eight scenario layers, and the scenario layer numbers are 0 to 7. Of these eight scenario layers, scenario layer 0 is a layer that mainly controls the background, scenario layer 1 is a layer that mainly controls the cut-in notice character, and scenario layer 2 is mainly the left design. Scenario layer 3 is a layer that mainly controls the right symbol, scenario layer 4 is a layer that mainly controls the middle symbol, and scenario layer 5 is a layer that mainly controls the hold. The scenario layer 6 is a layer that mainly controls the notice character, and the scenario layer 7 is a layer that mainly controls the fourth symbol.

  However, it is not restricted to this aspect. For example, although the number of scenario layers is 8 in this embodiment, the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the layers used for backgrounds and notices are increased or decreased depending on the model specifications, and in this embodiment, description is limited to as few as possible. Further, the control target of each scenario layer is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various allocations are possible. For example, scenario layer 0 is a layer that mainly controls the background, scenario layer 1 is a layer that mainly controls the left symbol, scenario layer 2 is a layer that mainly controls the right symbol, and scenario layer 3 is The layer that mainly controls the middle symbol, the scenario layer 4 is the layer that mainly controls the notice 1, the scenario layer 5 is the layer that mainly controls the notice 2, and the scenario layer 6 mainly controls the hold. The scenario layer 7 may be a layer that mainly controls the fourth symbol.

  The address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer. When there is something to be controlled, the scenario management area X corresponds to the address area of the scenario management area X (X = 0 to 7). When the address of the area is stored and there is nothing to control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL. For example, since no hold display is performed in a movie waiting for a customer, an address (address of scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (address area of scenario management area 0). NULL is set in (address area of scenario management area 6).

[Scenario analysis processing]
Next, details of the scenario analysis process (steps C202, C204, C206, C208, C210, C212, C214, and C216) in the scenario setting process described above will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the scenario analysis process, first, the value of brk (data used for repetition of the process described later) is set to 0 (step C221), and the prepared scenario management area X Data (address of scenario management area X or NULL) set in the address area is loaded (step C222). Here, “the prepared address area of the scenario management area X” means that, for example, when the scenario analysis process is executed in step C202 in the scenario setting process, it is prepared in the immediately preceding step C201. If the scenario analysis process is executed at step C204 in the scenario setting process (address area of the scenario management area 0), the address area (scenario management area 1) prepared at the immediately preceding step C203. In other cases, the address area is prepared in the immediately preceding step.

Next, it is determined whether the data at the address loaded in step C222 is NULL (step C223). If NULL (step C223; Y), the control is not necessary, and the scenario analysis process is terminated. If not NULL (step C223; N). Then, the value of the scenario timer in the scenario management area at the address loaded in step C222 is read to determine whether the value of the scenario timer is smaller than 0 (step C224). If it is smaller than 0 (step C224; Y), the scenario analysis process is terminated because it is abnormal. The scenario timer value is first set to 0 each time scenario control data is set, but 0 is the lower limit. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (step C224; N), if the scenario timer value is not 0, the scenario timer value is updated by -1 (step C225).
Then, it is determined whether the value of the scenario timer is greater than 0 (step C226). If it is greater than 0 (step C226; Y), the scenario analysis process is terminated because the time has not yet been reached, and is 0 or less. In the case (step C226; N), the process proceeds to step C227.

  According to these steps C224 to C226, wait timer management is performed. That is, only the time corresponding to the value of the scenario timer set in the scenario timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step C222) is the target scenario table (in the target scenario management area). The operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table at the address set in the scenario data table area is realized. Here, the “operation for delaying the control of the scenario table” means to wait for the progress of the scenario table (it does not proceed to the next line of the scenario table but waits there, and continues to produce at that time). . For example, in the 10th line (// 9) in FIG. 56, since the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (6), the time corresponding to 6 frames (in this embodiment, 6/30 seconds) (1 frame = 1/30 seconds)) Staying on this line and proceeding to the next line after the lapse of the time, this operation corresponds to “an operation for delaying the control of the scenario table”. In the scenario table, a line in which a code (a constant wait code or the like (including a PB (push button) waiting code) is included) between the wait time value and the wait time value is set, and then a constant wait code or the like is set. All opcodes between the lines) are executed at the same time. Then, when the value of the scenario timer becomes 0 or less due to the update of step C225, it is determined that the scenario timer has timed up, so that the control process of the target scenario table proceeds to proceed to step C227 via step C226. It has a configuration to proceed. However, the target scenario table control process (after step C234) is executed after the timer management process for the PB valid time described later.

That is, when the process proceeds to step C227, the value of the target PB timer (the value of the PB timer area in the scenario management area at the address loaded in step C222) is read, and it is determined whether the value of this PB timer is greater than zero. (Step C227) If it is greater than 0 (Step C227; Y), the time is not up, so proceed to Step C228. If it is 0 or less (Step C227; N), the time is up, so Proceed to C233.
When the process proceeds to step C228, it is determined whether or not a PB operation is detected (step C228). If a PB operation is detected (step C228; Y), the process proceeds to step C229 and no PB operation is detected. In (Step C228; N), the value of the target PB timer is updated by -1 (Step C232), and the process proceeds to Step C233. Here, whether or not a PB operation is detected is determined by whether or not a flag (PB operation flag) that is set when an operation on the PB is detected in the effect button input process (step C9) is set. . In the present embodiment, PB is an integrated product (production operation unit) of the production button 25 and the touch panel 29, and does not indicate only the push button (production button 25) provided in the production operation unit.

Proceeding to step C229, the value of the target PB timer at this time (that is, the remaining time of the PB effective time when the PB is pressed) is stored as the PB effect addition time (step C229), and then the target Is set to “0” (step C230), and the PB detection flag is set in the PB detection flag area of the target scenario management area (step C231). In these steps C229 to C231, since the PB has been operated, the remaining time of the PB timer is stored as the PB effect addition time, the PB timer is reset to 0, and the PB detection flag indicating that the PB has been operated is displayed. It is set in the scenario management area for scenario control.
In step C233, it is determined whether the value of the target PB timer is greater than 0 (step C233). If greater than 0 (step C233; Y), the PB operation is not detected and the time is up. If not, the scenario analysis process ends. If it is 0 or less (step C233; N), the process proceeds to step C234 because the PB operation has been performed or the time is up.

According to steps C227 to C233, timer management for the PB valid time is performed. That is, when a PB timer value larger than 0 is set in the PB timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step C222), this PB timer value is supported. The operation of delaying the control of the target scenario table (the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area) for the PB valid time is realized for the time to be set. Here, “the operation of delaying the control of the scenario table and providing the PB valid time” means that the value of the target PB timer is 0 (that is, the PB timer is timed up) or the PB is operated. Until it is done, it means to wait for the progress of the scenario table (waiting there without proceeding to the next line of the scenario table, continuing to produce at that time). For example, in the 10th line (// 9) of FIG. 56, since the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (6), the time corresponding to 6 frames remains in this line, and after the time has elapsed, the next time Although the process proceeds to the eleventh line, the operation by the tenth line is the “operation to delay the progress of the scenario table control” by the scenario timer described above. On the other hand, for example, when the PB wait (PUSH) code is set and the valid time value is (30), this valid time value (30) is set in the PB timer in the PB wait process (step C256). If there is no PB operation (specifically, PUSH operation (pressing operation)), the effective time corresponding to a maximum of 30 frames remains in this line, and within this effective time, the PB operation (specifically, PUSH operation (pressing operation)) is performed. If there is, the operation immediately proceeds to the next line. In this way, the operation of waiting for the operation on the PB for the effective time (PB effective time) set in the PB timer is “delaying the control progress of the scenario table and reducing the PB effective time. It corresponds to “operation to provide”. Then, without any operation on the PB, the value of the PB timer becomes 0 or less by updating the step C232, and the PB timer expires, or during the PB valid time until the PB timer expires, Is operated, the process proceeds to step C233 through step C232 or steps C229 to C231. In this case, the determination result in step C233 is No (the PB timer is 0), and the process proceeds to step C234.
However, when the value of the PB timer set in the PB timer area is 0 from the beginning, the process proceeds from step C227 to step C233, and further proceeds from step C233 to step C234 to immediately control (in this case) The PB valid time is 0 (none). Since the PB valid time is provided in the case of a notice effect or the like, in other cases, the value of the PB timer area is set to 0 and no PB valid time is provided.

Next, in step C234 and subsequent steps, control processing for the target scenario table is executed. This will be described below.
When the process proceeds to Step C234, the process from Step C234 to Step C273 at the loop end is repeatedly executed until a value other than 0 is set as the value of brk. That is, at step C273, which is the rear loop end, the value of brk at that time is read, and if the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step C234 and the process is repeated from the next step C235.

That is, when the process proceeds to step C234, first, steps C235 to C238 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step C239.
Specifically, first, the address of the scenario table is loaded from the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area (step C235). For example, in the case of scenario layer number 31 at step-up notice A, the address of the scenario table shown in FIG. 56 is loaded at step C235, and in the case of scenario layer number 32 at step-up notice A, The address of the scenario table shown in 57 is loaded in this step C235.
Next, an operation code of a specific line (specified line) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step C235 is acquired (step C236). The scenario table is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in which the operation code and operand data (scenario data) are set in each line. For example, in the case of FIG. 56, if the target is the scenario management area 31 (scenario layer number 31) and the designated line is the first line, “motion 4 registration”, which is the opcode data on the first line of the topmost scenario layer 31 "Code" is obtained in step C236.

Next, the operation code acquired in step C236 is separated into upper bits and lower bits and prepared (step C237). For example, when the operation code data is “51h”, the upper bit “5” and the lower bit “1” are separately prepared. The upper and lower bits of the opcode have meanings (however, the lower bits may have no meaning). For example, among “51h” which is the “motion 1 deletion code”, the upper bit “5” means the motion deletion, and the lower bit “1” is the target (in this case, the motion deletion target) motion. This means that the layer is motion 1.
Next, an operand of a specific row (designated row) of the scenario table designated by the address loaded in step C235 is acquired and prepared (step C238). For example, in the case of FIG. 56, if the target is the scenario management area 31 (scenario layer number 31) and the designated row is the first row, the “motion index No.” that is the operand data of the first row of the topmost scenario layer 31 .. (1) "is acquired and prepared in step C238.

Thereafter, when the process proceeds to step C239, the prepared operation code high-order data (data prepared by separating in step C237, the same applies hereinafter) is determined, and if it is data (motion registration code) instructing motion registration (step C239; Y ), After executing the motion registration process (step C251), the process proceeds to step C271. If the data is not data for commanding the motion registration (step C239; N), the process proceeds to step C240.
Proceeding to step C240, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (motion deletion code) commanding motion deletion (step C240; Y), the step after executing the motion deletion process (step C252) The process proceeds to C271, and if it is not data for commanding motion deletion (step C240; N), the process proceeds to step C241.

Proceeding to step C241, if the prepared operation code high-order data is determined and the data is the data (motion continuation code) for instructing motion continuation (step C241; Y), the step after executing the motion continuation process (step C253) is executed. The process proceeds to C271, and if it is not data for instructing to continue the motion (step C241; N), the process proceeds to step C242.
Proceeding to step C242, if the prepared operation code high-order data is determined and the data is a constant wait command (constant wait code) (step C242; Y), the constant wait process (step C254) is executed and then the step is performed. The process proceeds to C271, and if it is not data for instructing a constant wait (step C242; N), the process proceeds to step C243.

Proceeding to step C243, if the prepared opcode high-order data is determined and the data is a variable weight command (variable weight code) (step C243; Y), the variable weight process (step C255) is executed and then the step is performed. The process proceeds to C271, and if it is not data for instructing a variable weight (step C243; N), the process proceeds to step C244.
Proceeding to step C244, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (PB wait code) for instructing PB wait (step C244; Y), after executing the PB wait process (step C256), step The process proceeds to C271, and if it is not data for instructing to wait for PB (step C244; N), the process proceeds to step C245.

Proceeding to step C245, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (PB determination branch code) for instructing the PB determination branch (step C245; Y), the PB determination branch process (step C257) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step C271, and if it is not the data for commanding the PB determination branch (step C245; N), the process proceeds to step C246.
Proceeding to step C246, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is the data (stop symbol set code) commanding symbol stop (step C246; Y), after executing symbol stop processing (step C258) Proceeding to step C271, if the data is not data for commanding symbol stop (step C246; N), the process proceeds to step C247.

Proceeding to step C247, if the prepared opcode high-order data is determined and the data is for designating reverse symbol replacement (symbol reverse calculation replacement code) (step C247; Y), the reverse symbol replacement processing (step C259) ) Is executed, the process proceeds to step C271. If the data is not the data for commanding symbol reverse replacement (step C247; N), the process proceeds to step C248.
When the process proceeds to step C248, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (fluctuation scenario switching code) for instructing switching of the fluctuation scenario (step C248; Y), the fluctuation scenario switching process (step C260) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step C271, and if it is not the data for commanding the change scenario switching (step C248; N), the process proceeds to step C249.

When the process proceeds to step C249, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (repetition code) for commanding repetition (step C249; Y), the process proceeds to step C271 after executing the repetition process (step C261). If the data is not data for commanding repetition (step C249; N), the process proceeds to step C250.
When the process proceeds to step C250, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (end code) for commanding termination (step C250; Y), the termination process (step C262) is executed and then the process proceeds to step C271. If it is not data for instructing termination (step C250; N), the process proceeds to another step (not shown). It should be noted that other steps (not shown in FIG. 54) are the same as steps C239 to C262, and the contents of the prepared opcode upper data are determined, and the determination result is another type. The process corresponding to the case of data (code) is executed and the process proceeds to step C271. If the prepared opcode upper data does not correspond to any kind of data (code), the scenario analysis process is terminated. It has a configuration.

Then, when proceeding to Step C271, the data set at this time is read into the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number to determine whether this data is NULL (Step C271). (Step C271; Y), the value of brk is set to 1 (Step C272), and the process proceeds to Step C273. If not NULL (Step C271; N), the process proceeds to Step C273 without executing Step C272.
When the process proceeds to step C273, as described above, the value of brk at that time is read. If the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step C234 to repeat the process from the next step C235, and the value of brk is not 0. Returns to the scenario analysis process.

For this reason, in any process such as steps C251 to C262, the value of brk is set to a value other than 0, or NULL is set to the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number. Then, the loop processing with steps C234 and C273 as loop ends is completed and the process returns. Until the loop process is completed in this way, the address of the scenario data table area in the scenario management area (the address for designating the scenario table and its row) is appropriately changed, and the loop process is repeated until a series of steps are repeated. The production control is executed.
The above subroutine group (steps C251 to C262) is an example, and changes depending on the specifications of the model.

Here, the notice effect (particularly the parallel notice effect) that is characteristic of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining a notice effect in the present embodiment.
The notice effect is an effect for notifying (notifying or suggesting) a game result or the like. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the notice effects are as follows: at the start of fluctuation, before reach, during reach (at the start of N reach (normal reach), at the time of SP reach (special reach) development), and after reach And four timings.

The notice pattern (scenario table) of the notice effect (variation start notice effect) executed at the start of change is selected from “first half notice group 1” as shown in FIG.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, in the notice group lottery process A (step C102) of the first-half variable notice lottery process (see FIG. 50), “first half notice group 1” is set as the notice group for the notice effect at the start of change. Any one of the notice group to which it belongs ("background change notice", "step-up notice A", "step-up notice B") and "no notice" is selected.
Then, when “not notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process A, the notice effect at the start of change is shown in the notice detail lottery process A (step C104) of the notice lottery process during the first half change (see FIG. 50). Any one of the notice patterns (scenario tables) belonging to the notice group selected in the notice group lottery process A is selected as the notice pattern. For example, when “background change notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process A, “scenario table 1: dead tree”, “scenario table 2: green leaves”, “scenario table 3: cherry blossoms in full bloom”, and “scenario table” One of the four is selected.

The notice pattern (scenario table) of the notice effect (pre-reach notice effect) executed before the reach is selected from “first half notice group 2” as shown in FIG.
Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, in the notice group lottery process B (step C106) of the first-half variable notice lottery process (see FIG. 50), it belongs to “first half notice group 2” as the notice group of the pre-reach notice effect. One of the notice group and “no notice” is selected.
Then, when a setting other than “No notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process B, the notice of the pre-reach notice effect is given in the notice detail lottery process B (step C108) of the first-variation notice lottery process (see FIG. 50). Any one of the notice patterns (scenario tables) belonging to the notice group selected in the notice group lottery process B is selected as a pattern.

The notice pattern (scenario table) of the notice effect (execution during reach) executed during the reach is selected from “second half notice group 1” as shown in FIG.
Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, in the notice group lottery process C (step C112) of the latter-half variable notice lottery process (see FIG. 51), it belongs to “second half notice group 1” as the notice group of the reach notice effect during reach. Any one of the notice group ("group notice", "title notice", "object action notice") and "no notice" is selected.
Then, when a notice other than “No notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process C, the advance notice lottery notice during the reach in the notice detail lottery process C (step C114) in the latter half change notice lottery process (see FIG. 51). Any one of the notice patterns (scenario tables) belonging to the notice group selected in the notice group lottery process C is selected as a pattern. For example, when “group notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process C, “scenario table 1: green leaves group”, “scenario table 2: pink petal group”, “scenario table 3: red petal group”, and One of the “scenario table 4: rainbow petals” is selected.
In addition, the advance notice effect during reach is executed at the start of N reach, and when the reach develops to SP reach, it is also executed at the time of SP reach development.

The notice pattern (scenario table) of the notice effect (post-reach notice effect) executed after the reach is selected from “second half notice group 2” as shown in FIG.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, in the notice group lottery process D (step C116) in the latter-half variable notice lottery process (see FIG. 51), it belongs to “second half notice group 2” as a notice group for the notice effect after reach. One of the notice group and “no notice” is selected.
Then, when a notice group other than “no notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process D, in the notice detail lottery process D (step C118) in the latter half change notice lottery process (see FIG. 51), the notice of the notice effect after the reach is reached. Any one of the notice patterns (scenario tables) belonging to the notice group selected in the notice group lottery process D is selected as a pattern.

In this embodiment, when “step-up notice A” or “step-up notice B” is selected as the notice group of the notice notice at the start of change, the pseudo-continuous effect (one decoration based on one special figure starting memory) is selected. In a special figure variation display game, a pseudo-continuous announcement effect for giving notice (implying) the occurrence of a unit change display for displaying a plurality of identification information fluctuating for a predetermined period of time) and a notice (implying) for the occurrence of a reach effect. It is configured to execute a parallel notice effect that performs the reach notice effect in parallel.
Specifically, when “step-up notice A” is selected as the notice group of the notice notice at the start of change, “scenario table 2: SU2 notice” and “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo-continuation) are selected as the notice pattern. Notice) ”and“ scenario table 4: SU3 notice (reach notice) ”are selected, so that the parallel notice effect that performs the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the reach notice effect in parallel is executed. It is configured.
In addition, when “step-up notice B” is selected as the notice group of the notice notice at the start of change, the parallel notice that performs the pseudo-announce notice effect and the reach notice effect in parallel regardless of the selected notice pattern. It is comprised so that a production may be performed.

On a gaming machine that does not execute the pseudo-announcement effect and the reach-notice effect in parallel, the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect is denied when the reach-notification effect is executed, and the reach effect is generated when the pseudo-notice effect is executed. Will be denied. Therefore, for example, if the expectation that the result of the game is a special result (big hit) is higher when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs than when the reach effect occurs, such a game machine executes the reach notice effect. At that time, it was found that the pseudo-continuous notice effect with a higher expectation did not occur, so the interest was sometimes lowered. In addition, when the expectation that the game result is a special result is higher when the pseudo-rendition effect occurs than when the reach effect occurs, the reach notice effect is successful (that is, the reach effect after the reach notice effect) In many cases, the frequency of success of the pseudo-continuous announcement effect (that is, the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect after the pseudo-continuous announcement effect) is set lower than the frequency of occurrence of the pseudo-continuous announcement effect. The success frequency of the notice effect + the reach notice effect) is lowered, and the interest in the notice effect may be reduced.
On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the parallel notice effect that performs the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the reach notice effect in parallel can be executed, the notice with a lower expectation of the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the reach notice effect is provided. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating at the time when the performance is executed. In addition, even if the frequency of success of the other notice effect is set lower than the frequency of success of the one notice effect, these notice effects are executed in parallel. The success frequency of the notice effect (pseudo-continuous notice effect + reach notice effect) is higher than when it is not executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest with respect to the notice effect.

In other words, the production control device 300 first notices the occurrence of the first event (in the case of this embodiment, a pseudo-continuous production) (in the case of this embodiment, the pseudo-continuous notice effect), and the first A parallel notice effect is performed in parallel with a second notice effect (reach notice effect in the case of this embodiment) for notifying the occurrence of a second event (reach effect in the case of this embodiment) different from the event. The notice effect execution means to make.
The first event is not limited to the pseudo-rendition effect, and the second event is not limited to the reach effect. The first event and the second event can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate, and may be other effects (for example, a probable latent effect, an accessory action effect, etc.) or a game result. Also good.

Hereinafter, the parallel notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 63.
56 and 57 are diagrams showing an example of a scenario table used at the time of step-up notice A in the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 56 shows a case where “step-up notice A” is selected as the notice group of the notice notice at the start of change, and “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo continuous notice)” is shown as the notice pattern. FIG. 57 is a notice pattern (scenario table) set when selected, and FIG. 57 shows a case where “step-up notice A” is selected as the notice group for the notice effect at the start of change. Table 4: A notice pattern (scenario table) set when “SU3 notice (reach notice)” is selected.
58 and 59 are diagrams showing an example of the notice effect (step-up notice A) in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the effect control device 300 starts a step-up notice effect when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, first, an expectation suggestion image for notifying (suggesting) an expectation that will be a special result (big hit) is displayed ("// 0: SU1 motion registration"). ), And a wait time value (6) is set (“// 1: wait (6 frames)”). Thereby, as shown in FIG.58 (b), an expectation suggestion image is displayed on the middle fluctuation display area of the display apparatus 41. FIG.
When “scenario table 1: SU1 notice” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change, the expectation degree is not continued as shown in FIG. 58C, for example, without continuing the step-up notice effect. After changing the display mode of the suggestion image, a symbol confirmation (out of line) effect or reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, “scenario table 2: SU2 notice”, “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo-continuous notice)”, or “scenario table 4: SU3 notice (reach notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change. If it does, step up notice effect is continued. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, the display of the first pseudo-continuous notice image for notifying the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous production (“// 2: SU2 pseudo-continuous area motion registration”) and the reach production. Display of the first reach notice image in advance of occurrence (“// 3: SU2 reach notice area motion registration”) and set a wait time value (6) (“// 4: wait (6 frames)) ) "). As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), the first pseudo continuous notice image and the first reach notice image are displayed in the left change display area and the right change display area of the display device 41, respectively, and the parallel notice effect is started. Is done.
Then, when “scenario table 2: SU2 notice” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change, the expected degree is not continued without performing the step-up notice effect, for example, as shown in FIG. After changing the display mode of the suggestion image, a symbol confirmation (out of line) effect, a reach effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

On the other hand, when “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo-continuous notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change, as shown in FIG. 56, the display mode of the first pseudo-continuous notice image is changed. ("// 5: SU2 pseudo continuous area motion deletion", "// 7: SU3 pseudo continuous area motion registration") and change of the display mode of the first reach notice image ("// 6: SU2 reach notice area motion") Delete ”and“ // 8: SU3 reach notice area motion registration ”) and set a wait time value (6) (“ // 9: wait (6 frames) ”). As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), the colors of the first pseudo-continuous notice image and the first reach notice image change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56, the display mode of the first pseudo continuous notice image is changed (“// 10: SU3 pseudo continuous area motion deletion”, “// 11: pseudo continuous area selection motion registration”). A wait time value (6) is set (“// 12: wait (6 frames)”). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), the first pseudo-continuous notice image is surrounded by a thick frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56, the degree-of-expectation suggestion image is deleted (“// 13: SU1 motion deletion”) and the first reach notice image is deleted (“// 14: SU3 reach notice area motion registration”). The first pseudo-continuous preview image is deleted (“// 15: pseudo-continuous area selection motion deletion”), and the second pseudo-continuous preview image is displayed for notifying (notifying) that the pseudo-continuous effect has been generated. (“// 16: pseudo continuous area determination motion registration”), a wait time value (6) is set (“// 17: wait (6 frames)”). As a result, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the expectation suggestion image, the first reach notice image, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image disappear, and the second pseudo-continuous notice image is displayed. Executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56, the second pseudo-continuous preview image is deleted (“// 18: pseudo-continuous area determination motion deletion”), and the step-up preliminary announcement effect is ended (“// 19: end”). . Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 59B and 59C, the second pseudo-continuous notice image disappears, the parallel notice effect ends, and the process proceeds to the pseudo-continuous effect.

When “scenario table 4: SU3 notice (reach notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice notice at the start of change, as shown in FIG. 57, the display mode of the first pseudo continuous notice image is changed ( “// 5: SU2 pseudo continuous area motion deletion”, “// 7: SU3 pseudo continuous area motion registration”) and change of display mode of the first reach notice image (“// 6: SU2 reach notice area motion deletion) ”,“ // 8: SU3 reach notice area motion registration ”), and a wait time value (6) is set (“ // 9: wait (6 frames) ”). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 58 (g), the colors of the first pseudo-continuous notice image and the first reach notice image change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 57, the display mode of the first reach notice image is changed (“// 10: SU3 reach notice area motion deletion”, “/ 11: reach notice area selection motion registration”), and the weight is changed. A time value (6) is set (“// 12: wait (6 frames)”). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 58 (g), the first reach notice image is surrounded by a thick frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57, the degree of expectation suggestion image is deleted (“// 13: SU1 motion deletion”) and the first pseudo-continuous preview image is deleted (“// 14: SU3 pseudo-continuous region motion registration”). And delete the first reach notice image ("// 15: delete reach notice area selection motion"), and display the second reach notice image for notifying (notifying) that the reach effect has occurred (" // 16: Reach notice area confirmed motion registration ") and wait time value (6) is set (" / 17: wait (6 frames) "). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the expectation suggestion image, the first reach notice image, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image disappear, and the second reach notice image is displayed, and the reach confirmation effect is executed. The
Next, as shown in FIG. 57, the second reach notice image is deleted (“// 18: delete reach notice area determination motion”), and reach display is displayed (“// 19: reach display motion registration”). The wait time value (6) is set (“// 20: wait (6 frames)”). As a result, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), the second reach notice image disappears, the parallel notice effect ends, and a reach display (in this example, the character “reach”) is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 57, the reach display is deleted (“// 21: reach display motion deletion”), and the step-up notice effect is ended (“// 22: end”). Thereby, as shown in FIG.59 (f), a reach display disappears and it transfers to reach production.

FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scenario table used at the time of step-up notice B in the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 60 shows a case where “step-up notice B” is selected as the notice group of the notice effect at the start of change, and “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo continuous notice)” is given as the notice pattern. This is a notice pattern (scenario table) that is set when selected.
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect (step-up notice B) in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the effect control device 300 starts a step-up notice effect when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, first, an expectation suggestion image (“// 0: SU1 motion registration”) for notifying an expectation that will be a special result (big hit) is generated, and a pseudo-continuous production is generated. Display of the first pseudo-announcement image (“// 1: SU1 pseudo-continuous area motion registration”) and display of the first reach notice image for announcing the occurrence of the reach effect (“// 2: SU1 reach notice) Region motion registration ") and set a wait time value (6) (" // 3: wait (6 frames) "). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the expectation suggestion image, the first pseudo-continuous notice image, and the first reach are respectively displayed in the middle variation display region, the left variation display region, and the right variation display region of the display device 41. A preview image is displayed and a parallel preview effect is started.
Then, when “scenario table 1: SU1 notice” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice notice at the start of change, the step-up notice effect is not continued, for example, as shown in FIG. After the display mode of the suggestion image, the first pseudo-announcement image, and the first reach notice image is changed, a symbol confirmation (out of line) effect, a reach effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

On the other hand, “scenario table 2: SU2 notice”, “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo-continuous notice)”, or “scenario table 4: SU3 notice (reach notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change. If it does, step up notice effect is continued. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the display mode of the expectation suggestion image is changed (“// 4: SU1 motion deletion”, “// 7: SU2 motion registration”), and the first pseudo-continuous preview image. Change of the display mode (“// 5: SU1 pseudo continuous area motion deletion”, “// 8: SU2 pseudo continuous area motion registration”), and change of the display mode of the first reach notice image (“// 6: "SU1 reach notice area motion deletion", "// 9: SU2 reach notice area motion registration") and a wait time value (6) is set ("// 10: weight (6 frames)"). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the characters in the degree-of-expectation suggestion image, the first pseudo-continuous notice image, and the first reach notice image change.
Then, when “scenario table 2: SU2 notice” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change, the expectation degree is not continued as shown in FIG. 61 (e), for example, without continuing the step-up notice effect. After the display mode of the suggestion image, the first pseudo-announcement image, and the first reach notice image is changed, a symbol confirmation (out of line) effect, a reach effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

On the other hand, when “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo-continuous notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice notice effect at the start of change, as shown in FIG. // 11: Delete SU2 motion ”,“ / 14: Register SU3 motion ”) and change the display mode of the first pseudo-continuous preview image (“ // 12: Delete SU2 pseudo-continuous region motion ”,“ // 15 : SU3 pseudo continuous area motion registration "), change of the display mode of the first reach notice image (" // 13: SU2 reach notice area motion deletion "," // 16: SU3 reach notice area motion registration "), To set a wait time value (6) ("// 17: wait (6 frames)"). As a result, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), the characters in the degree-of-expectation suggestion image, the first pseudo-continuous notice image, and the first reach notice image change, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image and the first The color of the reach notice image changes.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60, the display mode of the first pseudo continuous notice image is changed (“// 18: SU3 pseudo continuous area motion deletion”, “/ 19: pseudo continuous area selection motion registration”). A wait time value (6) is set (“// 20: wait (6 frames)”). As a result, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), the first pseudo-continuous notice image is surrounded by a thick frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60, the degree-of-expectation suggestion image is deleted (“// 21: SU3 motion deletion”) and the first reach notice image is deleted (“// 22: SU3 reach notice area motion registration”). , Delete the first pseudo-continuous preview image (“// 23: delete pseudo-continuous area selection motion”), and display the second pseudo-continuous preview image for notifying the occurrence confirmation of the pseudo-continuous effect (“/ / 24: quasi-continuous region finalized motion registration ") and wait time value (6) is set (" // 25: wait (6 frames) "). As a result, the expectation suggestion image, the first reach notice image, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image disappear, and the second pseudo-continuous notice image is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous confirmation effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60, the second pseudo-continuous notice image is deleted (“// 26: pseudo-continuous area determination motion deletion”), and the step-up notice effect is ended (“// 27: end”). . As a result, the second pseudo-continuous preview image disappears and the parallel preliminary announcement effect ends, and the process shifts to the pseudo-continuous effect.

Further, when “scenario table 4: SU3 notice (reach notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice notice at the start of change, the display mode of the expectation suggestion image is changed, and the display of the first pseudo-continuous notice image is displayed. The wait time value is set by changing the mode and changing the display mode of the first reach notice image. As a result, as shown in FIG. 61 (g), the characters in the expectation degree suggestion image, the first pseudo-continuous notice image, and the first reach notice image change, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image and the first The color of the reach notice image changes.
Next, the display mode of the first reach notice image is changed to set the wait time value. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 61 (g), the first reach notice image is surrounded by a thick frame.

Next, the anticipation suggestion image is deleted, the first pseudo-continuous preview image is deleted, and the first reach notification image is deleted, and the second reach notification image for notifying the confirmation of the occurrence of the reach effect is displayed. Set the wait time value. Thereby, the expectation suggestion image, the first reach notice image, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image disappear, and the second reach notice image is displayed, and the reach confirmation effect is executed.
Next, the second reach notice image is deleted, a reach display is displayed, and a wait time value is set. As a result, the second reach notice image disappears, the parallel notice effect ends, and a reach display is displayed.
Next, the reach display is deleted, and the step-up notice effect is ended. As a result, the reach display disappears and the shift to the reach effect is made.

That is, the first control effect (in the case of the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous notification effect) and the second notification effect (the present embodiment) executed in parallel by the effect control device 300 (the effect control device 300). In this case, a notice effect selecting means for selecting one of the reach notice effect) is provided.
Further, the effect control device 300 serves as an event generating means for generating an event corresponding to the notice effect selected by the notice effect selecting means (effect control device 300). In the case of this embodiment, if the selected notice effect is a pseudo-continuous notice effect, a pseudo-continuous effect is generated, and if the selected notice effect is a reach notice effect, a reach effect is generated.

Further, the notice effect executing means (effect control device 300) can display a predetermined notice effect image on the display device 41 as a parallel notice effect, and can execute an effect of changing the display mode of the notice effect image at a predetermined timing. It is.
The notice effect image includes a first notice effect image for notifying the occurrence of the first event (in the case of the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous notice image (first pseudo continuous notice image, second pseudo continuous notice image)), and a second A second notice effect image (in the case of this embodiment, a reach notice image (first reach notice image, second reach notice image)).
In the present embodiment, when “step-up notice A” is selected, the timing of step-up from “step 2 (SU2)” to “step 3 (SU3)”, and from “step 3” The display mode of the notice effect image changes at the timing of shifting to the “confirmation effect (pseudo-continuation effect, reach confirmation effect)”.
When “step-up notice B” is selected, the timing of step-up from “step 1 (SU1)” to “step 2 (SU2)” and “step 2” to “step 3 (SU3)” The display mode of the notice effect image changes to “timing to step up” and “timing to shift from“ step 3 ”to“ confirmed effect (pseudo-continuous effect, reach confirmed effect) ”.

The notice effect execution means (effect control apparatus 300) is the first when the first notice effect (in the case of the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous notice effect) is selected by the notice effect selection means (effect control device 300). The display mode of one preview effect image (in the case of this embodiment, a pseudo-continuous preview image) is changed at a greater number of times than the display mode of the second preview effect image (in the case of this embodiment, reach notification image), and a preview is made. When the second notice effect (reach notice effect in the case of the present embodiment) is selected by the effect selection means (effect control device 300), the display mode of the second notice effect image is displayed as the first notice effect image. It is changed at more timing than the mode.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is selected, the reach notice image does not change (that is, the first reach notice image is changed from the first reach notice image when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is shifted to). Although it disappears without changing to the two-reach notice image, the pseudo-continuous notice image changes (that is, the first pseudo-continuous notice image changes to the second pseudo-continuous notice image). Therefore, when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is selected, the display form of the pseudo-continuous notice image changes at a higher timing than the display form of the reach notice image, so it can be seen which notice effect is selected. Cheap.
In addition, when the reach notice effect is selected, the pseudo continuous notice image does not change when shifting to the reach confirmation effect (that is, the first pseudo continuous notice image does not change to the second pseudo continuous notice image). But the reach notice image changes (ie, the first reach notice image changes to the second reach notice image). Therefore, when the reach notice effect is selected, the display form of the reach notice image changes at a higher timing than the display form of the pseudo-continuous notice image, so it is easy to understand which notice effect is selected. .

In the case of this embodiment, the expectation degree suggestion image appearing in the step-up notice A is noticed (suggested) as to the big hit expectation degree by the color of the image, as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 58, it is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree by the color of the expectation degree suggestive image appearing in “Step 1 (SU1)”, or at the time of step-up (ie, “ When stepping up from "Step 1" to "Step 2 (SU2)" or "Stepping up from" Step 2 "to" Step 3 (SU3) "), change the color of the expectation suggestion image It is also possible to configure so that the big hit expectation degree is notified in advance by the color of the final expectation degree suggestion image.
Moreover, you may make it display the character (for example, "one more time!" Etc.) which alert | reports the remaining number of step-ups in an expectation degree suggestion image. As a result, the expectation degree suggestion image can not only notify the big hit expectation degree but also notify the remaining number of step-ups.

In the case of the present embodiment, the expectation degree suggestion image appearing in the step-up notice B is informed of the big hit expectation degree by characters in the image as shown in FIG. 62 (b).
Note that it is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree by the characters in the expectation degree suggestion image appearing in “Step 1 (SU1)”. As shown in FIG. It is also possible to change the character in the suggestion image and notify the big hit expectation degree by the character in the final expectation degree suggestion image (in the case of FIG. 61, “Heat!”).
Moreover, you may make it display the character which alert | reports the remaining number of step-ups in an expectation degree suggestion image.

FIG. 63 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation during the step-up notice effect in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
Special figure fluctuation display game (that is, special figure fluctuation display game for variably displaying special symbols on special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52 and decorative special figure variability display for variably displaying decorative symbols on display device 41 When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of (game), a step-up notice effect is started.

When step-up notice A (SU notice A) is selected, an image is displayed only in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41 at the stage of “step 1”. In the case of the present embodiment, an expectation level suggestion image is displayed in the middle fluctuation display area, and the display mode of the expectation level suggestion image does not change even when stepping up.
Next, at the timing of stepping up from “step 1” to “step 2”, a pseudo continuous notice image (specifically, the first pseudo continuous notice image is displayed in the left variation display area (SU second area) of the display device 41. ) And a reach notice image (specifically, a first reach notice image) are displayed in the right variation display area (SU third area) of the display device 41.
Next, at the timing of stepping up from “Step 2” to “Step 3”, the display mode of the pseudo continuous announcement image displayed in the left variation display area (SU second area) of the display device 41 and the display device 41 are displayed. The display mode of the reach notice image displayed in the right fluctuation display area (SU third area) changes.

Next, a suggestion content notification is performed to notify (notify) the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect or the reach effect.
Specifically, in the case of notifying the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous production, as shown in FIG. 63, the expectation level suggestion image displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41, the display The reach notice image displayed in the right change display area (SU third area) of the device 41 is deleted, and the pseudo continuous notice displayed in the left change display area (SU second area) of the display device 41 is deleted. The display mode of the image changes (specifically, the first pseudo continuous notice image changes to the second pseudo continuous notice image). Thereby, the display (suggestion content notification) of the second pseudo-continuous notice image for notifying the occurrence confirmation of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and the process proceeds to the pseudo-continuous effect.
Further, when the occurrence of the reach effect is predicted, the expectation suggestion image displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41 and the left fluctuation display area (SU second of the display device 41). And the display mode of the reach notice image displayed in the right variation display area (SU third area) of the display device 41 is changed (specifically, the pseudo continuous notice image displayed in the area) is deleted (specifically, the area). , Change from the first reach notice image to the second reach notice image). Thereby, the display of the second reach notice image for notifying the confirmation of the occurrence of the reach effect (suggested content notification) is performed, and the process shifts to the reach effect.

In addition, when step-up notice B (SU notice B) is selected, an expectation-indicating image is displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41 at the stage of “step 1”. The pseudo continuous notice image (specifically, the first pseudo continuous notice image) is displayed in the left fluctuation display area (SU second area) of the display device 41, and the right fluctuation display area (SU third area) of the display device 41 is displayed. A reach notice image (specifically, a first reach notice image) is displayed.
Subsequently, at the timing of stepping up from “Step 1” to “Step 2”, the display mode of the expectation level suggestion image displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41, and the display device 41 Display mode of the pseudo continuous announcement image displayed in the left fluctuation display area (SU second area) and the display aspect of the reach announcement image displayed in the right fluctuation display area (SU third area) of the display device 41 And change.
Next, at the timing of stepping up from “Step 2” to “Step 3”, the display mode of the expected degree suggestion image displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41, and the display device 41 Display mode of the pseudo continuous announcement image displayed in the left fluctuation display area (SU second area) and the display aspect of the reach announcement image displayed in the right fluctuation display area (SU third area) of the display device 41 And change.

Next, a suggestion content notification is performed to notify (notify) the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect or the reach effect.
Specifically, in the case of notifying the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous production, the expectation suggestion image displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41 and the right fluctuation display area of the display device 41. The reach notice image displayed in the (SU third area) is deleted, and the display mode of the pseudo continuous notice image displayed in the left variation display area (SU second area) of the display device 41 changes ( Specifically, the first pseudo continuous notice image changes to the second pseudo continuous notice image). Thereby, the display (suggestion content notification) of the second pseudo-continuous notice image for notifying the occurrence confirmation of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and the process proceeds to the pseudo-continuous effect.
Further, in the case of giving notice of the occurrence of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 63, the expectation suggestion image displayed in the middle variation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41 and the left of the display device 41 The display mode of the reach notice image displayed in the right change display area (SU third area) of the display device 41 after the pseudo continuous notice image displayed in the change display area (SU second area) is deleted. Changes (specifically, changes from the first reach notice image to the second reach notice image). Thereby, the display of the second reach notice image for notifying the confirmation of the occurrence of the reach effect (suggested content notification) is performed, and the process shifts to the reach effect.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
Next, details of the look-ahead design command processing (step C64) in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 64, in the look-ahead design command processing, the effect control device 300 first determines whether the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301). That is, it is determined whether the latest prefetched symbol command received this time relates to the first start memory.

When the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, when it relates to the first start memory, the latest prefetched symbol command received this time is the special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. 1 Save in the pre-read symbol command area (step C302), set the pre-read variation command reception wait flag (step C304), and end the pre-read symbol command processing.
On the other hand, when the latest hold information is not special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, related to the second start memory, the latest prefetched symbol command received this time is the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of special figure hold. 2 is saved in the prefetch symbol command area (step C303), the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the prefetch symbol command processing is terminated.
The reason why the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 is that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
Next, details of the look-ahead variation command processing (step C66) in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 65, in the prefetch variation command processing, the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the prefetch variation command is waiting to be received (step C401). Here, when there is a prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag set in the above-mentioned prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that reception is awaiting.
If the prefetch fluctuation command reception is not awaited (step C401; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait is in progress (step C401; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C402).

Thereafter, in the processes of steps C403 to C406, a process of converting the prefetch fluctuation command (prefetch fluctuation pattern command) received from the game control apparatus 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control apparatus 300 is performed.
First, a process (step C403) for setting a prefetch variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of retained symbols in the latest pending information is performed (step C403), and the special type of start memory corresponding to the prefetch variation command received this time (see FIG. 1). Alternatively, a MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set according to the information of the special figure 2) and the current number of reservations of the special figure type.
Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is acquired (step C404).
Next, the prefetching variation ACT conversion table is set (step C405), and the sub-internal prefetching conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the prefetching variation command is acquired (step C406).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE vary depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of prior judgment and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game The determination result may differ depending on the determination of time.
Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the pre-reading notice effect without being influenced by the number of holds at the time of determination, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of holds.
For example, there is a possibility of a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation without reach and a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation. It is converted into MODE divided according to matters to be considered in the setting of the prefetching notice effect, so that the process of the prefetching notice effect can be performed easily and reliably.

In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter-half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holds at the time of determination.
However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, there are various aspects of the same type of reach, such as the case where the final stop symbol is set to the stop that stops one frame before the reach symbol, the stop that stops one frame ahead, and the winning case. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide.
For this reason, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted to the same ACT, thereby reducing the number and reducing the processing load such as the check in the pre-reading notice effect processing.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C407).
If the converted MODE and ACT are not other than 0 (step C407; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated because of an abnormal command value.
On the other hand, if the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C407; Y), the converted command is the latest hold information and the prefetch fluctuation command area corresponding to the number of holds (see FIG. 2 is saved (step C408), and a prefetch command consistency check process (step C409) is performed to determine whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal.

If the command combination is not normal (step C410; N) as a result of the prefetch command matching check process (step C409), the prefetch variation command process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C410; Y), a prefetch lottery process (step C411) for lottery execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed to determine whether a prefetch notice effect is generated (step C412).

If no prefetching notice effect is generated (step C412; N), the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when the prefetching notice effect is generated (step C412; Y), is the prefetching notice effect that is generated (that is, the prefetching notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C411)) immediately started? Is determined (step C413). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the start memory display area 41b of the display device 41, or the start memory display area 41b of the display device 41. This is a pre-reading notice effect (described later) for rotating the displayed rotation bar B. Further, the effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice effect that is performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and an effect that generates a specific effect or a reach state continuously over a plurality of special figure variation display games, For example, a notice is given by a character appearing during the variable display. The timing of starting the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately is that the special figure fluctuation display game is ended if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, and the execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game is started. The corresponding timing is applicable.

If the effect is not to start immediately (step C413; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. In this case, a notice is set at the start of a special figure change display game that executes a prefetch notice effect.
On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C413; Y), a scenario layer number corresponding to the selected prefetching notice effect is prepared (step C414), and the scenario data table corresponding to the selected prefetching notice effect is prepared. Are prepared (step C415), and the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

[Pre-fetch lottery processing]
Next, the details of the prefetch lottery process (step C411) in the prefetch fluctuation command processing described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 66, in the prefetch lottery process, the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed (step C421). In the present embodiment, the case where the prefetch lottery can be executed is a case where the prefetch notice effect is not being executed. This condition can be arbitrarily set.

When the prefetch lottery can be executed (step C421; Y), it is determined whether the latest hold information (hold information to be processed) is the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) (step C422). If it is in FIG. 2 hold (step C422; Y), it is determined whether or not it is in the effect mode in which the pre-reading notice effect can be produced in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold (step C423). In the present embodiment, the effect mode in which the pre-reading notice effect is possible is an effect mode in the short-time state.
In the special figure variation display game based on the special figure 2 suspension, when the pre-reading notice effect is not possible (step C423; N), the prefetch lottery process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the special mode fluctuation display game based on special figure 2 hold is in the production mode capable of pre-reading notice effect (step C423; Y), or when the latest hold information (hold information to be processed) is not special figure 2 hold (Step C422; N) clears all the prefetch control areas to zero (Step C424), and prefetches all pending precautions of the latest pending special figure (the same type as the target pending (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2)) A variation command is loaded (step C425).

Next, a prefetch change combination confirmation process (step C426) for confirming whether or not the content of the variation based on each hold (special figure variation display game) can execute the prefetch notice effect is performed from the prefetch result of each hold, and the prefetch notice It is determined whether it is a combination of fluctuations that can produce an effect (step C427).
If it is not a combination of changes that can perform the pre-reading notice effect (step C427; N), the pre-read lottery process is terminated. When it is not a combination of fluctuations that can perform a pre-reading notice effect, a hold that is digested before a hold subject to processing is digested before a reach effect with a higher degree of reliability or a hold subject to processing This is the case when a big hit is made by holding, or when there is a possibility that an inconsistency in the production may occur if a pre-reading notice production is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is a combination of fluctuations that can perform the pre-reading notice effect (step C427; Y), the pre-read lottery group address table corresponding to the pre-read symbol command of the latest hold (hold for processing) is acquired (step C428). Based on the acquired prefetch lottery group address table, a prefetch lottery group table corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is acquired (step C429). The case of a combination of fluctuations that can perform the pre-reading notice effect is a case where all the holds that are digested before the hold to be processed are shifted without reach.

  The look-ahead symbol command referred to in step C428 includes a determination result that can identify the result and the probability state that brings about the result, that is, “exceeding either low probability state or high probability state”, “low probability state and high probability state” Either of them is a big hit or a big hit only in a high probability state. Based on this information, the prefetch lottery group address table is acquired.

In the prefetch lottery group table acquired based on the prefetch lottery group address table in step C429, the type of prefetch notice effect that can be executed and the selection probability are defined. The table selected in the case of “big hit only in the game” does not include a specific advance notice effect that is an effect for definite notification of the big hit.
This is because the second start memory is generated when the pre-reading notice effect for the first start memory is performed, and a big hit is generated by the second start memory, and the probability state is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state. This is because it may change. In other words, the first start memory that is “big hit only in a high probability state” was a big hit at the start of the pre-reading notice effect, but it would be lost due to a change in the probability state, so the big hit is confirmed. The specific advance notice effect, which is an effect to be notified, is not performed.

Next, it is determined whether the acquired address is undefined data (step C430), and if it is not undefined data (step C430; N), random number lottery processing for lottery of presence / absence of pre-reading notice effect and type of effect (Pre-reading notice lottery process) is performed (step C431).
As a result of the random number lottery process (step C431), when the prefetch notice effect is not performed (step C432; N), the prefetch lottery process ends. Even when the acquired address is undefined data (step C430; Y), the prefetching notice effect is not performed (step C432; N), and the prefetching lottery process is terminated.
On the other hand, when performing the pre-reading notice effect (step C432; Y), the number of pre-reading effects that is the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game that executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the latest hold information (the hold information to be processed) is set. (Step C433), the execution flag of the determined prefetch notice effect is set (Step C434), and the prefetch lottery process is terminated.

If the prefetch lottery cannot be executed (step C421; N), it is determined whether the latest hold information (hold information to be processed) is special figure 2 hold (second start memory) (step C435). If the special figure 2 is not on hold (step C435; N), the prefetch lottery process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is on hold (step C435; Y), it is determined whether a pre-reading notice effect for performing an interruption effect in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold is being executed (step C436). The prefetching notice effect for performing the interrupt effect in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold is a prefetching notice effect based on the special figure 1 hold (first start memory), and the special figure 2 hold executed by interruption. This is a pre-reading notice effect capable of executing an effect related to the special figure variation display game based on the game.

When the pre-reading notice effect for performing the interrupt effect in the special figure variation display game based on the special figure 2 suspension is not being executed (step C436; N), the pre-read lottery process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice effect for performing the interrupt effect in the special-figure display game based on the special figure 2 hold is being executed (step C436; Y), the pre-read control area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is being executed. Is saved (step C437), and the prefetch lottery process is terminated. In step C437, an effect related to the pre-reading notice effect being executed which is to be performed in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 suspension is set. As such an effect, for example, the same effect as the pre-reading notice effect being executed is set.

Here, a pre-reading notice effect (variable notice effect) for rotating and displaying the rotation bar B displayed in the start memory display area 41b of the display device 41, which is a feature of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described.
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of the display area of the display device 41. FIGS. 69A and 69B are diagrams for explaining an example of the rotation bar B displayed in the start memory display area 41b of the display device 41. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the rotation bar B, and FIG. It is a side view of bar B, and (c) is an explanatory view of each field which rotation bar B has.
As shown in FIG. 68, the display area of the display device 41 includes a main display area 41a where a decoration special figure variation display game is executed (displayed), and a start memory display area 41b where a decoration special figure start memory display C is displayed. And consist of

In the present embodiment, a rotation bar B is displayed in the start memory display area 41b as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the rotation bar B is a substantially quadrangular prism-like bar that is long in the left-right direction, and as shown in FIG. It can be rotated (rotated) around (shown by a one-dot chain line in a). As the rotation bar B rotates, four surfaces parallel to the rotation axis among the surfaces of the rotation bar B are sequentially displayed in the start memory display area 41b.
69 (a) and 69 (b) show a perspective view and a side view of the rotating bar B for the sake of convenience in order to explain the rotating bar B. In the present embodiment, the display device 41 includes a rotating bar. Only the state where the bar B is viewed from the front is displayed. Of course, the display device 41 has a state in which the rotating bar B is viewed from an oblique direction (for example, a state as shown in FIG. 69A) or a state in which the rotating bar B is viewed from the side surface (for example, FIG. It is also possible to display a state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B, the four surfaces parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation bar B are a default reservation area, a character effect area, a mini game area, and a hold change area, respectively.
As shown in FIG. 69 (c), the default reserved area is an area where a decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the special figure start memory is displayed. In the case of this embodiment, the character effect area and the mini game area are displayed. Adjacent to and.
In addition, the character effect area is an area in which a character for notifying (suggesting) the prefetch result is displayed. In the case of the present embodiment, the character effect area is adjacent to the default hold area and the hold change area, and as shown in FIG. It is supposed to be. Of course, the look-ahead result notified in advance by the characters displayed in the character effect area is not limited to the big hit expectation, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the type of variation pattern may be used.
The mini game area is an area in which a mini game for notifying (suggesting) a prefetch result is displayed. In the case of the present embodiment, the mini game area is adjacent to the default hold area and the hold change area, and the jackpot expectation is predicted in accordance with the result of the mini game displayed in the area. Of course, the look-ahead result to be notified in advance by the mini-game result displayed in the mini-game area is not limited to the jackpot expectation, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. Also good.
In addition, the hold change area is an area that can be changed to a display mode in which the decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the special figure start memory is displayed and the prefetch result is notified (implied). That is, the hold change area is different from the default hold area only in that it can be changed to a display mode for notifying the prefetch result. In the case of the present embodiment, the hold change area is adjacent to the character effect area and the mini game area, and as shown in FIG. ing. Of course, the look-ahead result notified in advance by the color of the reserved change area is not limited to the jackpot expectation, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the type of variation pattern may be used. Further, the display mode for notifying the prefetch result is not limited to the color, and can be arbitrarily arbitrarily changed. For example, a pattern or the like may be used. That is, it is also possible to make a configuration in which the prefetch result is notified in advance based on the pattern of the pending change area.

[Pre-reading notice scenario control process]
Next, the prefetching notice scenario control process executed when the prefetching notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C411) of the prefetching variation command process is an effect that starts immediately will be described.
In the case of the present embodiment, for the effect to start immediately, a pre-reading notice effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the start memory display area 41b of the display device 41, and the start memory of the display device 41 There is a pre-reading notice effect for rotating and displaying the rotation bar B displayed in the display area 41b, and which one is executed is determined based on the big hit expectation degree or the like in the pre-read lottery process (step C411).
The prefetching notice effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C is a prefetching notice effect that does not rotate the rotation bar B, and it is prefetched depending on the display form of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the default hold area. It is an effect to give notice of the result.

Further, the pre-reading notice effect for rotating the rotation bar B includes “a pre-reading notice effect performed in the character effect area”, “a pre-reading notice effect performed in the mini game area”, and “a pre-reading notice effect performed in the hold change area” The “prefetching notice effect performed in the pending change area” can be selected together with the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” and the “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area”. In other words, in the case of the present embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect for rotating the rotation bar B, (a) “pre-fetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” and (b) “pre-reading notice effect performed in the mini game area”, (C) “Prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area”, (d) “Prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” + “Prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area”, and (e) “Perform in the mini game area” There is “prefetching notice effect” + “prefetching notice effect performed in the on-hold change area”, which is executed is determined based on the big hit expectation degree or the like in the prefetch lottery process (step C411).
Furthermore, the pattern of “pre-reading notice effect performed in the character effect area” includes a pattern that displays the operation during rotation and a pattern that does not perform the operation display during rotation. Which pattern is selected is determined based on the big hit expectation degree or the like in the look-ahead lottery process (step C411). Here, the operation display during rotation is a display representing a state in which the rotation bar B is fluctuating at high speed (high-speed rotation) as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the pre-reading notice scenario control process, the effect control apparatus 300 first determines whether or not a notice code has been set (step C441). In the case of the present embodiment, the notice code includes a character effect mode code set at the time of executing the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” and a mini set at the time of executing the “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area”. Game execution mode code.

When the notice code has already been set (step C441; Y), it is the end timing of the prefetching notice effect being executed, that is, "the prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area" or "the prefetch notice effect performed in the mini game area". Is checked (step C442).
When it is the end timing of the prefetching notice effect being executed (step C443; Y), after clearing the set notice code, the type of the prefetching notice effect being executed is “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the hold change area”. In other words, the prefetching notice effect being executed is (d) “prefetching notice effect produced in the character effect area” + “prefetching notice effect produced in the hold change area” or (e) “performed in the mini game area” It is determined whether the effect is being executed based on the selection of “prefetching notice effect” + “prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area” (step C444).

When the type of the prefetching notice effect being executed is a type including “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the hold change area” (step C444; Y), that is, the prefetching notice effect being executed is (d) “performed in the character effect area. An effect that is executed based on the selection of “prefetching notice effect performed in pre-change notice area” + “prefetching notice effect provided in hold change area” or (e) “prefetch notice effect provided in mini game area” + “prefetch notice effect provided in hold change area” If there is, the process proceeds to step C458.
On the other hand, when the type of the prefetching notice effect being executed is not a type including “prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area” (step C444; N), that is, the prefetching notice effect being executed is (a) “in the character effect area. If it is an effect that is being executed based on the selection of the “prefetching notice effect to be performed” or (a) “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the mini game area”, the process proceeds to step C456.

If it is not the end timing of the pre-reading notice effect being executed (step C443; N), it is determined whether additional suspension has occurred (step C445).
If no additional suspension has occurred (step C445; N), the process proceeds to step C441.
On the other hand, when an additional hold occurs (step C445; Y), a process of causing an additional hold effect display D (see FIGS. 75B and 75C and FIGS. 76B and 76C) to appear (step C446). ), The process proceeds to step C441.

If the notice code has not been set (step C441; N), the type of the selected prefetching notice effect is a type including “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area”, that is, the selected prefetch notice. It is determined whether the effect is (a) “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” or (d) “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” + “prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area” (step C447). .
When the type of the selected prefetching notice effect is a type including “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” (step C447; Y), the rotation bar B displayed in the hold area (starting storage display area 41b). Is operated (rotated) (step C448), and it is determined whether or not the selected “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the character effect area” is a pattern for displaying an operation during rotation (step C449).

  When the selected pattern of “pre-reading notice effect to be performed in the character effect area” is a pattern for displaying the operation during rotation (step C499; Y), the character effect mode (the operation display during rotation is present) according to the expected degree of jackpot ) A code is set (step C450), and the process proceeds to step C461. By setting the character effect mode (with operation display during rotation) code according to the big hit expectation, the operation display during rotation appears. Further, as a result of rotation of the rotation bar B, a character effect area having a display mode (character effect mode) corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot may be displayed.

  On the other hand, when the selected pattern of “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the character effect area” is a pattern in which the operation display during rotation is not performed (step C499; N), the character effect mode (in rotation) according to the big hit expectation degree No operation display) A code is set (step C451), and the process proceeds to step C461. By setting a character effect mode (no operation display during rotation) code according to the degree of jackpot expectation, a character effect area of a display mode (character effect mode) according to the jackpot expectation level is displayed as the rotation result of the rotation bar B. The

If the type of the selected prefetching notice effect is not a type including “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” (step C447; N), the type of the selected prefetch notice effect is “prefetching performed in the mini game area”. In other words, the selected prefetching notice effect is (i) “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area” or (e) “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area” + “pending change” It is determined whether or not the “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the area” (step C452).
When the type of the selected prefetching notice effect is a type including “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area” (step C452; Y), the rotation bar B displayed in the hold area (starting storage display area 41b). Is operated (rotated) (step C453), a mini game execution mode code is set according to the degree of big hit expectation (step C454), and the process proceeds to step C461. By setting the mini game execution mode code according to the big hit expectation degree, the mini game area is displayed as the rotation result of the rotation bar B, and according to the big hit expectation degree as a result of the mini game executed in the mini game area. Results.

On the other hand, if the selected type of the prefetching notice effect is not a type including “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area” (step C452; N), the type of the selected prefetching notice effect is “prefetching performed in the hold change area”. It is determined whether or not the selected prefetching notice effect is (c) “prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area” (step C455).
When the type of the selected prefetching notice effect is not “prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area” (step C455; N), that is, when the selected prefetching notice effect is a prefetching notice effect that does not rotate the rotation bar B. Shifts to the process of step C456.
In step C456, when the default hold area is not displayed in the start memory display area 41b, the rotation bar B displayed in the hold area (start memory display area 41b) is operated (rotated) (step C456). The default reserved area is displayed as the rotation result of the rotation bar B (step C457). Thereafter, a scenario end code is set (step C460), and the process proceeds to step C461.

If the selected prefetching notice effect is a prefetching notice effect that does not rotate the rotation bar B, the default hold area has already been displayed, so the rotation bar B is rotated in steps C456 and C457 to rotate the default hold area. Is not performed, and the process of changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C is performed.
In the present embodiment, in order to execute an existing effect as a pre-reading notice effect for changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display C, here, a process for changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display C is described. Description of is omitted.

On the other hand, when the type of the selected prefetching notice effect is “prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area” (step C455; Y), the process proceeds to step C458.
In step C458, the rotating bar B displayed in the holding area (starting storage display area 41b) is operated (rotated) (step C458), and the holding change area mode is set according to the big hit expectation (step C459). . By setting the hold change area mode according to the jackpot expectation level, the hold change area of the display mode (hold change area mode) corresponding to the jackpot expectation level is displayed as the rotation result of the rotation bar B. Thereafter, a scenario end code is set (step C460), and the process proceeds to step C461.

In step C461, it is determined whether a scenario end code is set (step C461).
If the scenario end code is not set (step C461; N), the process proceeds to step C441.
On the other hand, when the scenario end code is set (step C461; Y), the off information of the notice display data is set (step C461), and the prefetch notice scenario control process is finished. By setting the off information of the notice display data, the default reserved area is displayed when the default reserved area is not displayed in the start storage display area 41b.

Conventionally, as a pre-reading notice effect performed in the start memory display area 41b, a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C has been executed. However, this pre-reading notice effect is a monotonous effect that simply changes the color and design (icon) of the decoration special figure start memory display C, and thus it has been difficult to enhance the interest of the player.
On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, as a prefetching notice effect performed in the start memory display area 41b, a prefetching notice effect that rotates the rotation bar B (specifically, a variable effect that rotates the rotation bar B is performed). Since it is possible to perform a novel effect that has not been achieved in the past, such as a variable notice effect in which a prefetch notice effect is given to predict the prefetch result later, the player's interest can be enhanced. In addition, as the rotation result of the rotation bar B, any one of a plurality of areas included in the rotation bar B (in the case of this embodiment, a character effect area, a mini game area, and a hold change area) is displayed. It is possible to create a game characteristic different from the display game (specifically, a game characteristic “which area is displayed”).

In other words, the game control device 100 can store up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories that are the right to execute a variable display game based on the inflow of game balls to the start area (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). Storage means and pre-determination means for determining the result of the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game.
In addition, the production control device 300 displays a start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display C) corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means (game control device 100) in the start memory display area 41b. It serves as a control means.

Then, the start memory display control means (production control device 300) starts the start memory display (decoration special figure start) in a predetermined area image (in the case of the present embodiment, the default holding area image) displayed in the start memory display area 41b. The memory display C) is displayed, and in the start memory display area 41b, after performing a variation effect that variably displays a plurality of area images including the predetermined area image, a prior determination result by the prior determination means (game control device 100) is displayed. It is configured to be able to execute a variable notice effect (a pre-read notice effect in which the rotation bar B is rotated and displayed in the case of the present embodiment) for performing a notice effect for giving a notice.
Here, the “region image” is an image representing only one region. Therefore, the images shown in the start storage display area 41b of FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (d), that is, a plurality (two in the case of FIG. 71 (c), the default holding area and the character effect area, FIG. 71 (d) In the case of), an image representing the two areas of the default reserved area and the mini game area is not included in the “area image”.
Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, a default reserved area image representing only the default reserved area (see the first figure from the top in FIG. 69C) and a character effect area image representing only the character effect area (FIG. 69 ( c) (see the second figure from the top), the mini game area image representing only the mini game area (see the third figure from the top in FIG. 69 (c)), and the pending change representing only the pending change area. The area image (see the fourth figure from the top in FIG. 69C) becomes the “area image”.

Specifically, the start memory display control means (effect control device 300) displays a region image to be displayed in the start memory display region 41b as a variable effect as a plurality of region images (in the case of this embodiment, a default reserved region image, a character). (Effect area image, mini game area image, and hold change area image).
In the case of the present embodiment, the area image to be displayed in the startup storage display area 41b is in the order of default hold area image → character effect area image → hold change area image → mini game area image, or default hold area image → mini game. It is configured to switch in the order of area image → holding change area image → character effect area image.
The variation effect is not limited to the effect of rotating and displaying the rotation bar B, and can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is an effect of switching the area image displayed in the start-up storage display area 41b among a plurality of area images. For example, an effect of turning a picture book (specifically, an effect of turning a picture book and switching a page image (region image) displayed in the start-up storage display area 41b) may be used.
The variation effect is an effect of switching the region image displayed in the start memory display region 41b among a plurality of region images (that is, variable display at a speed at which each region image displayed in the start memory display region 41b can be identified). The display is not limited to an effect that can be displayed in a variable manner, and can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is an effect that variably displays a plurality of area images. For example, it may be an effect in which each region image displayed on 41b is variably displayed at a speed that is difficult to identify.

In addition, the start memory display control means (production control device 300), as a result of the variation production, provides a plurality of types of notice area images (in the case of this embodiment, a character production area image, a mini game area image, and a hold change area image). Is stopped and displayed in the start storage display area 41b, and a notice effect corresponding to the notice area image that has been stopped and displayed among a plurality of kinds of notice effects is executed in the notice area that has been stopped and displayed. Has been.
In the case of the present embodiment, for example, when the stop-displayed notice area image is a character effect area image, “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” is executed as the notice effect corresponding to the character effect area image.
Further, for example, when the stopped notice area image is a mini game area image, a “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area” is executed as a notice effect corresponding to the mini game area image.
Further, for example, when the stop-displayed notice area image is a hold change area image, a “prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area” is executed as a notice effect corresponding to the hold change area image.

71 is a diagram for explaining an example of the rotation timing of the rotation bar B. FIG.
As long as the change notice effect (that is, the pre-read notice effect that rotates and displays the rotation bar B) is not executed, the default storage area of the rotation bar B is displayed in the start memory display area 41b as shown in FIG. It is displayed. In this state, when a start winning (additional hold) occurs and a special figure start memory is added, a decorative special figure start memory display C is added to the default hold area as shown in FIG. 71 (b).

When the pre-read lottery process (step C411) is performed on the added special figure start memory, and the pre-reading notice effect for rotating the rotation bar B is selected, the rotation bar B rotates (step C448, step C453 or step C458), and as a result, a character effect area, a mini game area, or a hold change area is displayed. The rotation direction of the rotary bar B may be the forward direction as shown in FIG. 71 (c), or the backward direction as shown in FIG. 71 (d).
The rotation direction of the rotation bar B may be a rotation direction in which an area displayed as a rotation result can be efficiently displayed, or may be determined based on a big hit expectation degree or the like in a prefetch lottery process (step C411). The rotation direction in which the area displayed as the rotation result can be efficiently displayed is, for example, the forward direction as shown in FIG. 71 (c) when the area displayed as the rotation result is the character effect area. For example, when the area displayed as the rotation result is a mini game area, it is the backward direction as shown in FIG.

FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” in a pattern in which the operation display during rotation is not performed.
As long as the change notice effect (that is, the pre-read notice effect that rotates and displays the rotation bar B) is not executed, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), the start storage display area 41b has a default reserved area for the rotation bar B. It is displayed. In this state, when a start winning (additional hold) occurs and a special figure start memory is added, a decorative special figure start memory display C is added to the default hold area as shown in FIG. 72 (b).

  The pre-reading lottery process (step C411) is performed for the added special figure start memory, and a pre-reading notice effect for rotating the rotation bar B is selected. The type of the selected pre-reading notice effect is selected. When the type includes “pre-reading notice effect performed in the character effect area” (step C447; Y), the rotation bar B rotates (step C448). When the selected “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the character effect area” is a pattern in which the operation display during rotation is not performed (step C499; N), as shown in FIG. A character effect area is displayed as a rotation result of B.

Next, when the type of the prefetching notice effect being executed is a type including “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the hold change area” (step C444; Y), the rotation bar B rotates (step C458), and FIG. As shown in d), the reserved change area is displayed as the rotation result of the rotation bar B. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the hold change area is the same as the display mode before rotation (see FIG. 72 (b)). Then, after the change notice effect is finished, the default hold area is displayed in the start memory display area 41b. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the default holding area is the same as the display mode before rotation (see FIG. 72 (b)).
In addition, when the type of the pre-reading notice effect being executed is not a type including the “pre-reading notice effect performed in the hold change area” (step C444; N), the rotation bar B rotates (step C456), and FIG. ), The default reserved area is displayed as the rotation result of the rotation bar B. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the default holding area is the same as the display mode before rotation (see FIG. 72 (b)).

FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining an example of “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the mini game area”.
While the change notice effect (that is, the pre-read notice effect for rotating the rotation bar B) is not being executed, the default storage area for the rotation bar B is displayed in the start memory display area 41b as shown in FIG. 73 (a). It is displayed. In this state, when a start winning (additional hold) occurs and the special figure start memory is added, a decorative special figure start memory display C is added to the default hold area as shown in FIG. 73 (b).

  The pre-reading lottery process (step C411) is performed for the added special figure start memory, and a pre-reading notice effect for rotating the rotation bar B is selected. The type of the selected pre-reading notice effect is selected. When the type includes “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the mini game area” (step C452; Y), the rotation bar B rotates (step C453), and as shown in FIG. A mini game area is displayed as a result of the rotation, and the mini game starts in the mini game area. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (c) to 73 (f), a tug-of-war game is performed as a mini game, and a jackpot expectation is notified in advance according to the result of the game.

Next, when the type of the prefetching notice effect being executed is a type including “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the hold change area” (step C444; Y), the rotation bar B rotates (step C458), and FIG. As shown in g), the reserved change area is displayed as the rotation result of the rotation bar B. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the hold change area is the same as the display mode before rotation (see FIG. 73 (b)). Then, after the change notice effect is finished, the default hold area is displayed in the start memory display area 41b. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the default holding area is the same as the display mode before rotation (see FIG. 72 (b)).
If the type of the prefetching notice effect being executed is not a type including “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the hold change area” (step C444; N), the rotation bar B rotates (step C456), and FIG. ), The default reserved area is displayed as the rotation result of the rotation bar B. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the default holding area is the same as the display mode before rotation (see FIG. 73 (b)).

FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” of the pattern for displaying the operation during rotation.
As long as the fluctuating notice effect (that is, the pre-reading notice effect for rotating the rotation bar B) is not executed, as shown in FIG. It is displayed. In this state, when a start winning (additional hold) occurs and a special figure start memory is added, a decorative special figure start memory display C is added to the default hold area as shown in FIG. 74 (b).

When the pre-read lottery process (step C411) is performed for the added special figure start memory as a target, and a pre-reading notice effect for rotating the rotation bar B is selected, the type of the selected pre-reading notice effect is selected. When the type includes “pre-reading notice effect performed in the character effect area” (step C447; Y), the rotation bar B rotates (step C448). When the selected “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the character effect area” is a pattern for displaying the operation during rotation (step C499; Y), as shown in FIG. 74 (c), the rotation bar B A rotating operation display showing the state of rotating at high speed appears.
At that time, as shown in FIGS. 74 (c) to 74 (i), the character effect region may be displayed between the operation displays during rotation. The number of times that the character effect area is displayed between the operation displays during rotation is determined based on, for example, the big hit expectation degree in the pre-read lottery process (step C411).

Next, when the type of the prefetching notice effect being executed is a type including “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the on-hold change area” (step C444; Y), it is shown in FIGS. 74 (e), (h), and (j). As described above, the reserved change area is displayed as the rotation (high-speed rotation) result of the rotation bar B. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the hold change area is the same as the display mode before rotation (see FIG. 74 (b)). Then, after the change notice effect is finished, the default hold area is displayed in the start memory display area 41b. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the default holding area is the same as the display mode before rotation (see FIG. 72 (b)).
In the present embodiment, when the operation display during rotation appears, the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” may not be executed. Specifically, when the character effect area is not displayed between the operation display during rotation (that is, when the number of times the character effect area is displayed between the operation display during rotation is “0”), “character Since the “pre-reading notice effect performed in the effect area” is not executed, the pre-read result cannot be notified in advance. Therefore, the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” of the pattern that displays the operation during rotation is configured to be selected together with the “prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area”, and the pattern that performs the operation display during rotation. After executing the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area”, the “prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area” is always executed. Of course, there may be a case where the “prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area” is not executed after the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” of the pattern in which the operation display during rotation is performed.

  In addition, when the type of the prefetching notice effect being executed is a type including “prefetching notice effect performed in the hold change area” (step C444; N), the default hold area is set as a result of rotation (high speed rotation) of the rotation bar B. Is displayed. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the default holding area is the same as the display mode before rotation (see FIG. 74 (b)).

FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of an additional hold effect performed when an additional hold occurs during the execution of the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area”.
As shown in FIG. 75A, if a start winning (additional hold) occurs during execution of the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area” (step C445; Y), an additional hold effect display D (in this example) , “Letters” appear) (step C446), and the additional holding effect starts.

  In this additional hold effect, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the additional hold effect display D moves from the main display area 41a to the start storage display area 41b (character effect area), or in FIG. 75 (c). As shown, the additional hold effect display D in the main display area 41a is pressed with the changing identification information (in this example, the number “2”) and moves to the start memory display area 41b (character effect area). Produce etc. When the movement is successful, as shown in FIG. 75 (d), the display mode of the character effect area (character effect mode) changes (in this example, “Rinse with an opportunity!” To “ It ’s a great opportunity! ”). Moreover, when the said movement is not successful, the display mode of a character production area does not change.

  In the case of the present embodiment, whether or not the movement is successful is determined according to a newly generated pre-read result of additional hold. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 75, the result of the variable display game based on the suspension of the processing target (that is, the suspension that triggered the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character rendering area”) is a big hit. Since the expectation level is “medium”, before the additional hold effect is displayed, the text “A good opportunity!” Is displayed in the character effect area, but the variable display based on the newly generated additional hold Since the degree of expectation that the game result is a big hit is “Large”, after performing the additional hold effect, the characters “Rinse is a great machine!” Are displayed in the character effect area. Of course, whether or not the movement is successful is determined according to the prefetching result of the suspension of the processing target (that is, the suspension that triggered the “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the character rendering area”). Is also possible. When determining whether or not the movement is successful according to the pre-read result of the processing target hold, the characters (character effect mode) in the character effect area are the same regardless of whether or not the additional hold effect is executed. .

If a start prize (additional hold) occurs during the execution of the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area”, the additional hold effect is not performed immediately (that is, the additional hold effect display D immediately appears), It is also possible to configure such that an additional hold effect is performed when the effect button 25 or the like is operated.
In addition, when the start winning (additional hold) occurs, the additional hold effect is not performed, but the pattern of performing the additional hold effect and the additional hold effect are not performed as the pattern of the “prefetching notice effect performed in the character effect area”. It is also possible to prepare a pattern in advance and determine which pattern of the “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the character effect area” is to be determined based on the expectation level or the like in the prefetch lottery process (step C411). It is.

FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of an additional hold effect performed when an additional hold occurs during the execution of the “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area”.
As shown in FIG. 76 (a), if a start prize (additional hold) occurs during execution of the “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area” (step C445; Y), an additional hold effect display D (in this example, , An image representing “nutrition drink”) appears (step C446), and an additional holding effect starts.

In this additional hold effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the additional hold effect display D moves from the main display area 41a to the start memory display area 41b (mini game area), or in FIG. 76 (c). As shown, the additional hold effect display D in the main display area 41a is pushed with the changing identification information (in this example, the number “2”) and moves to the start memory display area 41b (mini game area). Produce etc. If the movement is successful, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), if the result of the mini-game running in the mini-game area has a high jackpot expectation (for example, expectation “medium” Or “high”). If the movement is not successful, as shown in FIG. 76 (f), the additional holding effect display D is pressed by the changing identification information and broken (in this example, the bottle of “nutrition drink” The result of the mini game running in the mini game area is displayed when the big hit expectation is low (for example, when the expectation is “low”).
Whether or not the movement is successful may be determined according to the prefetching result of the suspension of the processing target (that is, the suspension that triggered execution of the “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area”). However, it may be determined in accordance with the pre-read result of the additional hold that has newly occurred. When determining whether or not the movement is successful in accordance with the pre-read result of the hold to be processed, the result of the mini game is the same regardless of whether or not the additional hold effect is executed.

If a start prize (additional hold) occurs during execution of the “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area”, the additional hold effect is not immediately performed (that is, the additional hold effect display D immediately appears) It is also possible to configure such that an additional hold effect is performed when the effect button 25 or the like is operated.
In addition, when a start winning (additional hold) occurs, an additional hold effect is not performed, but a pattern for performing an additional hold effect and an additional hold effect are not performed as a pattern of “prefetching notice effect performed in the mini game area” It is also possible to prepare a pattern in advance and determine which pattern of the “prefetching notice effect to be performed in the mini game area” is determined based on the big hit expectation degree or the like in the prefetch lottery process (step C411). It is.

In addition, the effect performed in the character effect area may not be executed as a pre-reading notice effect, but may be executed at the start of the special figure variation display game (at the time of the on-hold digestion). That is, instead of displaying a character for notifying the prefetch result in the character effect area, it is possible to display a character for notifying the result of the special figure variation display game being executed.
In addition, the effect performed in the mini game area may not be executed as a pre-reading notice effect, but may be executed at the start of the special-figure display game (at the time of suspension). That is, instead of displaying a mini game for notifying the prefetch result in the mini game area, it is possible to display a mini game for notifying the result of the special figure hold display game being executed.
Further, the effect performed in the hold change area may not be executed as the pre-reading notice effect, but may be executed at the start of the special figure change display game (at the time of holding the game). That is, the hold change area may be configured to change to a display mode for notifying the result of the special figure hold display game being executed instead of changing to a display mode for notifying the prefetch result.

According to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the result of a predetermined game that is executed based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) is a special result. A game machine capable of executing a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, and is in a closed state and an open state in response to the execution of the special game (a game that gives a special game state) A convertible first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) and a second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39 that can convert between a closed state and an open state in response to execution of a special game) ), A first game ball detecting means (up count switch 38a) for detecting a game ball flowing into the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38), and a second variable winning device (second special variable winning device). Second game for detecting a game ball flowing into the device 39) A prize for performing conversion control between the ball detecting means (lower count switch 39a) and the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) in the special game. A predetermined time after the device control means (game control device 100) and the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) or the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) are converted to the closed state. Effective period setting means (game control device 100) for setting the period until the elapse of time as the effective period (large winning opening remaining ball processing period),
The winning device control means (game control device 100) includes conversion condition determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not the open state conversion condition of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is satisfied. And when the open condition conversion condition of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is determined by the conversion condition determining means, the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device). 38) is converted to the open state, and the valid period setting means (game control device 100) applies the first variable winning device to the first variable winning device when the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is converted to the closed state. An effective period (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) is set, and the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is opened by the conversion condition determining means (game control device 100) before the predetermined time elapses. Conversion condition is met If it is determined that is configured to terminate the active period and the set without waiting for the said predetermined time.
Specifically, the winning device control means (game control device 100) satisfies the open state conversion condition of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) by the conversion condition determination means (game control device 100). After the elapse of a predetermined period (interval period) from the time determined to be, the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is converted to an open state.

  Therefore, if the open state conversion condition of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is satisfied before the predetermined time has elapsed, the first variable winning device ( Since the effective period (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) for the first special variable winning device 38) is ended, the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) can be converted smoothly.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the winning device control means (the gaming control device 100) satisfies the open state conversion condition of the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39). Conversion condition determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not the game has been performed, and it is determined by the conversion condition determining means that the open state conversion condition of the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) has been established. When it is, the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted to the open state, and the validity period setting means (game control device 100) is changed to the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device). When the device 39) is converted to the closed state, an effective period (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) for the second variable winning device is set, and the conversion condition determining means (game control device 100) before the predetermined time elapses. Second variation prize dress When the open state conversion condition (second special variation winning device 39) is determined to be established, it is configured to terminate the active period and the set without waiting for the said predetermined time.
Specifically, in the winning device control means (game control device 100), the open condition conversion condition of the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is established by the conversion condition determination means (game control device 100). After the elapse of a predetermined period (interval period) from the time determined to be, the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted to an open state.

  Therefore, if the open state conversion condition of the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is satisfied before the predetermined time elapses, the second variable winning device ( Since the effective period (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) for the second special variable winning device 39) is ended, the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) can be smoothly converted.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) are The special game consists of a predetermined number of rounds, and the winning device control means (game control device 100) converts the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) into the open state. And the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) are alternately converted to the open state for each round, and the effective period (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) for one variable winning device is completed. Later, the one variable winning device can be converted to an open state.

When comprised in this way, conversion to the open state of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus (1st special variable prize-winning apparatus 38) and conversion to the open state of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus (2nd special variable prize-winning apparatus 39) are carried out. Since it is performed alternately for each round, the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) or the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) can be smoothly converted to the open state. In addition, the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) or the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) to be converted can be changed smoothly.
The first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) are arranged side by side, and the first variable winning device (first In order to alternately convert the first special variable winning device 38) to the open state and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) to the open state, the first variable winning device (first special winning device 38) While the upper variable winning device of the variable winning device 38) and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is in the open state, the game ball flows into the upper variable winning device and the upper variable winning device. During the closed state, the lower variable winning device is in the open state, and the game balls that could not flow into the upper variable winning device can flow into the lower variable winning device. Therefore, it is possible to reduce game balls that do not flow into the variable winning device.
In addition, after the effective period (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) for one of the variable winning devices has ended, the game ball that has flowed into the one of the variable winning devices in order to convert the one variable winning device to an open state Can be detected in an appropriate round.

  According to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, when a result of a predetermined game performed on the display device 41 becomes a special result, a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player can be executed. A first notice effect (in the case of the present embodiment, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) for notifying the occurrence of the first event, and the occurrence of a second event different from the first event. The second notice effect (the reach notice effect in the case of the present embodiment) is performed in parallel with the notice effect executing means (effect control device 300) for executing the parallel notice effect, and the notice effect executing means (the effect control device 300). ) Executed in parallel with the first notice effect (pseudo-continuous notice effect) and the second notice effect (reach notice effect), a notice effect selection means (effect control device 300), and a notice effect selection Means (Production Control Device It is configured to include an event generating means for generating a corresponding event to the informational display the selected (effect control device 300), a by 00).

  Therefore, the first notice effect (pseudo-continuous notice effect) and the second notice effect are performed in order to perform the parallel notice effect that executes the first notice effect (pseudo-continuous notice effect) and the second notice effect (reach notice effect) in parallel. The player's expectation can be maintained until either one of the (reach notice effects) is selected, and the player's interest can be enhanced with respect to various notice effects.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the notice effect execution means (the effect control device 300) displays a predetermined notice effect image on the display device 41 as a parallel notice effect, and the notice effect. It is possible to configure such that an effect of changing the display mode of the image at a predetermined timing can be executed.

  By configuring in this way, after the notice effect image is displayed, until either one of the first notice effect (pseudo continuous notice effect) and the second notice effect (reach notice effect) is selected, the player Can maintain a sense of expectation.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the notice effect image is a first notice effect image (in the case of this embodiment, a pseudo-continuous notice image) for notifying the occurrence of the first event, Including a second notice effect image (reach notice image in the case of the present embodiment) for notifying the occurrence of the second event, and the notice effect executing means (effect control device 300) is a notice effect selecting means (effect control device). 300), when the first notice effect (pseudo continuous notice effect) is selected, the display form of the first notice effect image (pseudo continuous notice image) is changed to the display form of the second notice effect image (reach notice image). When the second notice effect (reach notice effect) is selected by the notice effect selection means (effect control device 300), the display mode of the second notice effect image (reach notice image) is changed. The first notice effect picture It can be configured to vary in a number of timing than the display mode of (pseudo continuous announcement image).

  With this configuration, the display mode for the notice effect image corresponding to the notice effect selected by the notice effect selecting means (effect control device 300) is not selected by the notice effect selecting means (effect control device 300). Until it is determined which display mode of the notice effect image changes more (in this embodiment, the second pseudo-continuous notice image). Or until the second reach notice image appears), the player's expectation can be maintained.

  According to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, a variable display device (display device) capable of executing a variable display game based on the inflow of game balls to the start area (start winning prize port 36, normal variable winning device 37). 41), and is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the variable display device (display device 41) The display area includes a main display area 41a in which a variable display game is executed, and a start memory display area 41b. The display area changes based on the inflow of game balls to the start area (start winning prize port 36, normal variable winning device 37). Start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing start memory as a right to execute a display game up to a predetermined upper limit number, and start history corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means (game control device 100) Start memory display control means (production control device 300) for displaying the display (decoration special figure start memory display C) in the start memory display area 41b, and fluctuations based on the start memory stored in the start memory means (game control device 100) Pre-determining means (game control device 100) for determining the result of the display game before the execution of the variable display game, and the start-up storage display area 41b has a predetermined area image (default in the case of the present embodiment). (The reserved area image) can be displayed, and the start memory display control means (production control device 300) displays a start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display C) in a predetermined area image (default reserved area image). In the start memory display area 41b, after performing a variation effect in which a plurality of area images including the predetermined area image are variably displayed, the preliminary determination means (game control device 100) It is constructed before the determination result (pre-read result) to the be executed fluctuation prediction effect performed announcement attraction to notice.

  Therefore, since the change notice effect that performs the notice effect of notifying the prior determination result (prefetch result) after performing the change effect that variably displays a plurality of area images in the start-up memory display area 41b can be executed. This makes it possible to execute a preliminary announcement effect, and enhances the player's interest in the preliminary announcement effect executed in the start memory display area 41b.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the plurality of area images include a plurality of types of notice area images (in the case of this embodiment, a character effect area image, a mini game area image, and a hold change). The start memory display control means (production control device 300) stops and displays any one of a plurality of types of notice area images in the start memory display area 41b as a result of the variable effect. In the displayed notice area image, a plurality of kinds of notice effects (in the case of the present embodiment, "prefetch notice effect performed in the character effect area", "prefetch notice effect performed in the mini game area", and "prefetch effect performed in the hold change area"). It is possible to configure a notice effect corresponding to the notice area image that has been stopped and displayed among the notice effects ").

By configuring in this way, one of a plurality of types of notice area images (a character effect area image, a mini game area image, and an on-hold change area image) is stopped and displayed as a result of the change effect. Since the notice effect corresponding to the notice area image that is stopped and displayed in the notice area image is executed, the notice effect is executed in an area that the player does not expect, so that the notice effect can be surprising.
In addition, since any one of a plurality of types of notice area images (a character effect area image, a mini game area image, and a hold change area image) is displayed as a result of the change effect, which type of notice area image is displayed. It is possible to create a game characteristic different from the variable display game being executed in the main display area.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the start memory display control means (the effect control device 300) displays a region image to be displayed in the start memory display region 41b as a variable effect as a plurality of region images ( In the case of the present embodiment, it is possible to configure so as to perform an effect of switching among a default hold area image, a character effect area image, a mini game area image, and a hold change area image.

  By configuring in this way, the area image to be displayed in the start-up storage display area 41b as a variation effect is a plurality of area images (default hold area image, character effect area image, mini game area image, and hold change area image). In order to stop the display of any of a plurality of types of notification area images as a result of the variation effect, the player's expectation of which type of notification area image is displayed is maintained. be able to.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
Note that the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment performs the prefetching notice effect of rotating the rotation bar B in the start memory display area 41b of the display device 41 (that is, the prefetching result after performing the variable effect of rotating the rotation bar B). In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display C is not displayed in the start memory display area 41b. It differs from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment in that a pre-reading notice effect for giving a notice of a pre-read result in the area is performed. Therefore, hereinafter, parts having the same configurations as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

In the case of the present embodiment, the start memory display area 41b is the sum of the upper limit number of the first start memory and the upper limit number of the second start memory (as shown in the default reserved area of the rotation bar B) as shown in FIG. In the case of this embodiment, it has the same number of small regions as 8). One decoration special figure start memory display C is displayed in one small area, and as shown in FIG. 78, an empty small area (small area where the decoration special figure start storage display C is not displayed). ), A small area that is not adjacent to the small area where the decorative special figure start memory display C is displayed constitutes a noticeable effectable area where the prefetching notice effect can be executed.
In other words, the start memory display area 41b is divided into a plurality of (eight in the case of the present embodiment) small areas, and the start memory display control means (production control device 300) has one small area. It is configured to display a start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display C).
Note that the small area constituting the noticeable effect possible area may be at least an empty small area (small area in which the decorative special figure start storage display C is not displayed). For example, the noticeable effect possible area may include an empty small area adjacent to the small area where the decorative special figure start memory display C is displayed. That is, the noticeable effect possible area may be configured by any of the small empty areas in the start memory display area 41b, or may be configured by all the small empty areas in the start memory display area 41b. May be.

  In the present embodiment, a notice display symbol (letters, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) is displayed for each vacant small area that constitutes a noticeable effect possible area, thereby notifying the occurrence of a pseudo-continuous effect (notification). ). Of course, the look-ahead result notified in advance by the notice display pattern displayed in the area where the notice effect can be displayed is not limited to the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. Degree, latent probability variation expectation, and the like.

[Pre-reading notice scenario control process]
In the present embodiment, a prefetch notice scenario control process shown in FIG. 77 is executed instead of the prefetch notice scenario control process shown in FIG.
In the pre-reading notice scenario control process, the effect control device 300 first determines whether a notice display (may be a part of the notice display) is being displayed in the notice effect available area of the start memory display area 41b. (Step C541).

When the notice display is being displayed in the notice effect available area of the start memory display area 41b (step C541; Y), that is, when the pre-read notice effect is being executed in the notice effect available area, the notice display is updated. It is determined whether it is timing (step C542). In the case of this embodiment, when the number of decoration special figure start memory display C displayed in the start memory display area 41b changes (that is, the decoration special figure start memory display C displayed in the start memory display area 41b after the hold is digested). When the number of the special display start memory display C displayed in the start memory display area 41b is increased due to the occurrence of additional suspension, it is determined that it is the update timing of the notice display.
When it is not the update timing of the notice display (step C542; N), the process proceeds to step C541.
On the other hand, if it is the update timing of the notice display (step C542; Y), the updated notice display data is acquired (step C543), and the process proceeds to step C546.

  Further, when the notice display is not being displayed in the notice effect available area of the start memory display area 41b (step C541; N), that is, when the pre-read notice effect is not being executed in the notice effect available area, the current gaming state Accordingly, the notice display mode is selected by lottery (step C544), the notice display initial data corresponding to the result of the lottery is acquired (step C545), and the process proceeds to step C546. In step C544, for example, a random number lottery is performed to select a notice display mode. In the case of the present embodiment, when the current game state is the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 79, one of “notice effect pattern A” and “notice effect pattern B” is selected as the notice display mode. The When the current game state is the specific game state (short time state), as shown in FIG. 80, “notice effect pattern A”, “notice effect pattern B1”, “notice effect pattern B2”, and “notice effect” Any one of the “pattern B3” is selected as the notice display mode.

In step C546, the number of noticeable effect possible areas is acquired based on the number of holds (step C546). That is, the number of small areas constituting the noticeable effect possible area (in the case of the present embodiment, among the small small areas, the small small areas that are not adjacent to the small area on which the decorative special figure start storage display C is displayed) is acquired. .
Next, a comparison is made as to whether the display number of the notice display based on the notice display data obtained in step C543 or the notice display initial data obtained in step C545 is larger than the obtained number of available notice effect areas (step C547). For example, when the notice display data or the notice display initial data is data for displaying a notice display (preliminary display symbol group) of “pseudo continuous!”, The number of display notice displays based on the data (that is, the notice display) The number of the notice display symbols constituting “) is five,“ pseudo ”,“ similar ”,“ ream ”,“! ”,“! ”.

When the display number of the notice display is not larger than the acquired number of areas where the notice effect can be displayed (step C548; N), that is, when the number of areas where the notice effect can be displayed and the number of display of the notice display are the same, When the display number of the notice display is smaller than the number, the notice display based on the notice display data or the notice display initial data is displayed in the notice effect possible area (step C550), and the process proceeds to step C551.
On the other hand, when the display number of the notice display is larger than the acquired number of available notice effect areas (step C548; Y), all the notice display based on the notice display data or the notice display initial data is displayed in the notice effect available area. Therefore, a part of the notice display to be displayed in the notice effect available area is determined (step C549). In the case of the present embodiment, as a part of the notice display to be displayed in the notice effect available area, a part of the notice display that includes the same number of continuous notice display patterns as the number of the notice effect available areas is determined. Specifically, for example, when the notice display is “pseudo-series !!” and the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed is “3”, “pseudo” is displayed as a part of the notice display displayed in the area where the notice effect can be displayed. "Ren" or "Ren !!"
Next, a part of the determined notice display is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550), and the process proceeds to step C551.

In step C551, it is determined whether a scenario end code is set (step C551).
If the scenario end code is not set (step C551; N), the process proceeds to step C541.
On the other hand, when the scenario end code is set (step C551; Y), the off information of the notice display data is set (step C552), and the prefetch notice scenario control process is finished.

That is, the start memory display control means (production control device 300) is configured to determine the advance determination means (game control) in the empty small area where the start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display C) is not displayed among the plurality of small areas. It is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying the preliminary determination result by the apparatus 100).
Specifically, the start memory display control means (the effect control device 300) displays a notice display for giving a notice of the prior determination result in the empty small area as the notice effect, and the display mode of the notice display (in the case of the present embodiment). The effect of changing the number of the notice display symbols to be displayed) in accordance with the number of empty small areas can be executed.
Note that the display mode of the notice display to be changed according to the number of small free areas is not limited to the number of the notice display symbols to be displayed, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate, for example, by the color of the notice display. There may be.

FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pre-reading notice effect that is executed when the current gaming state is the normal gaming state.
When the current game state is the normal game state, one of “notice effect pattern A” and “notice effect pattern B” is selected as the notice display mode (step C544). Here, as described above, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

When “notice effect pattern A” is selected as the notice display mode, a prefetch notice effect as shown in FIG. 79A is executed in the start memory display area 41b.
Specifically, first, notice display initial data for displaying a notice display of “pseudo train!” Is acquired (step C545).
Next, in this example, since four decoration special figure start memory displays C are displayed in the start memory display area 41b, “3” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be provided (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the display number (5) of the notice display is larger than the number of available notice effect areas (3) (Step C548; Y), and “pseudo-continuous” is determined as a part of the notice display to be displayed. (Step C549).
Next, as shown in the first row (uppermost row) from the top of FIG. 79 (a), a notice display “pseudo-continuous” is displayed in the notice effect possible area (step C550).

When one hold is consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and the notice display data for displaying the notice display “Pseudo-link?” Is acquired (step C543). .
Next, “4” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the number of display of the notice display (5) is larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (4) (step C548; Y), and “pseudo continuous?” Is determined as a part of the notice display to be displayed. (Step C549).
Next, as shown in the second row from the top in FIG. 79 (a), a notice display “Pseudo train?” Is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

When one hold is further consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and notice display data for displaying a notice display “pseudo-link !!” is acquired (step C543). ).
Next, “5” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the display number (5) of the notice display is not larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (5) (step C548; N), as shown in the third row from the top in FIG. In addition, a notice display “Pseudo train!” Is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

When one hold is further consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and notice display data for displaying a notice display “pseudo-link?” Is acquired (step C543). ).
Next, “6” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the display number (5) of the notice display is not larger than the number of available notice effect areas (6) (step C548; N), as shown in the fourth row from the top in FIG. 79 (a). In addition, a notice display “Pseudo-continuous?” Is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

When one hold is further consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and the notice display data for displaying the notice display “pseudo-series !!” or “pseudo-series ??” The notice display data for displaying the notice display is acquired (step C543). In the case of the present embodiment, the number of decoration special figure start memory displays C displayed in the start memory display area 41b is “0”, and a pseudo-continuous effect is produced in the special figure fluctuation display game being executed. When the expected degree of occurrence is high, a notice display “Pseudo-continuous !!” is displayed, and the number of decoration special figure start memory displays C displayed in the start memory display area 41b is “0”. If the expectation level that the pseudo-continuous effect is generated is low in the special figure variation display game that is being executed, a notice display “Pseudo-continuous?” Is displayed.
Next, “8” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the display number (5) of the notice display is not larger than the number of available notice effect areas (8) (step C548; N), as shown in the fifth row from the top in FIG. 79 (a). In addition, a notice display “Pseudo-continuous !!” or a notice display “Pseudo-continuity?” As shown in the sixth row (bottom row) from the top of FIG. (Step C550).

When “notice effect pattern B” is selected as the notice display mode, a pre-read notice effect as shown in FIG. 79 (b) is executed in the start memory display area 41b.
Specifically, first, notice display initial data for displaying a notice display “□□□ pseudo-ream!” Is acquired (step C545). Here, “□” means a space.
Next, in this example, since four decoration special figure start memory displays C are displayed in the start memory display area 41b, “3” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be provided (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the number of display of the notice display (7) is larger than the number of possible notice effect areas (3) (step C548; Y), and “□□□” is determined as a part of the notice display to be displayed. (Step C549).
Next, as shown in the first row (uppermost row) from the top in FIG. 79 (b), a notice display “□□□” is displayed in the noticeable effect possible area (step C550).

When one hold is consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and the notice display data for displaying the notice display “□□□ pseudo-continuous?” Is acquired (step C543).
Next, “4” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the number of display of the notice display (7) is larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (4) (step C548; Y), and “□□□ pseudo” is displayed as a part of the notice display to be displayed. It is determined (step C549).
Next, as shown in the second row from the top in FIG. 79 (b), a notice display “□□□ pseudo” is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

When one more hold is consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and notice display data for displaying the notice display “□□□ pseudo-ream!” Is acquired ( Step C543).
Next, “5” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the number (7) of the display of the notice display is larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (5) (step C548; Y), and “□□□ pseudo” is displayed as a part of the notice display to be displayed. It is determined (step C549).
Next, as shown in the third row from the top in FIG. 79 (b), a notice display “□□□ pseudo” is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

When one hold is further consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and the notice display data for displaying the notice display “□□□ pseudo-continuous?” Is acquired ( Step C543).
Next, “6” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the number of display of the notice display (7) is larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (6) (Step C548; N). Is determined (step C549).
Next, as shown in the fourth row from the top in FIG. 79 (b), a notice display “□□□ pseudo-ream” is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

When one more hold is consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and notice display data for displaying a notice display “□□□ pseudo-ream!” Or “□□□ Preliminary display data for displaying the preliminary display “pseudo continuous?” Is acquired (step C543). In the case of the present embodiment, the number of decoration special figure start memory displays C displayed in the start memory display area 41b is “0”, and a pseudo-continuous effect is produced in the special figure fluctuation display game being executed. When the expected degree of occurrence is high, a notice display “□□□ quasi-ream!” Is displayed, and the number of decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the start memory display area 41b is “0”. In this case, when the expectation level that the pseudo-continuous effect is generated is low in the special figure variation display game being executed, a notice display “□□□ pseudo-continuous?” Is displayed.
Next, “8” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the display number (7) of the notice display is not larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (8) (step C548; N), as shown in the fifth row from the top in FIG. 79 (b). The notice display “□□□ quasi-ream!” Or the notice display “□□□ quasi-ream?” As shown in the sixth row (bottom) from the top of FIG. It is displayed in the area (step C550).

FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pre-reading notice effect executed when the current gaming state is the specific gaming state (short time state).
When the current game state is the specific game state, any one of “notice effect pattern A”, “notice effect pattern B1”, “notice effect pattern B2”, and “notice effect pattern B2” is displayed as a notice display mode. Is selected (step C544).

When “notice effect pattern A” is selected as the notice display mode, a prefetch notice effect as shown in FIG. 80A is executed in the start memory display area 41b.
Specifically, first, the initial display data for displaying the notice “Pseudo train!” Is acquired (step C545).
Next, in this example, since four decoration special figure start memory displays C are displayed in the start memory display area 41b, “3” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be provided (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the number of display of the notice display (4) is larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (3) (step C548; Y), and “pseudo-continuous” is determined as a part of the notice display to be displayed. (Step C549).
Next, as shown in the first row (uppermost row) from the top in FIG. 80 (a), a notice display “Pseudo-continuous” is displayed in the notice effect possible area (step C550).

When one hold is consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and notice display data for displaying the notice display “pseudo-continuous?” Is acquired (step C543).
Next, “4” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the display number (4) of the notice display is not larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (4) (step C548; N), as shown in the second row from the top of FIG. In addition, a notice display “Pseudo-continuous?” Is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

Further, when one hold is consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and notice display data for displaying a notice display “pseudo-ream!” Is acquired (step C543). .
Next, “5” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the display number (4) of the notice display is not larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (5) (step C548; N), as shown in the third row from the top in FIG. In addition, a notice display “Pseudo-ream!” Is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

When one hold is further consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and notice display data for displaying a notice display “pseudo-continuous?” Is acquired (step C543). .
Next, “6” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the display number (4) of the notice display is not larger than the number of available notice effect areas (6) (step C548; N), as shown in the fourth row from the top in FIG. In addition, a notice display “Pseudo-continuous?” Is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

Further, when one hold is consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and the notice display data for displaying the notice display “pseudo-series !!!!!!” or “pseudo-series”. The notice display data for displaying the notice display “??????” is acquired (step C543). In the case of the present embodiment, the number of decoration special figure start memory displays C displayed in the start memory display area 41b is “0”, and a pseudo-continuous effect is produced in the special figure fluctuation display game being executed. When the degree of expectation to be generated is high, a notice display “Pseudo ream !!!!!!” is displayed, and the number of decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the start memory display area 41b is “0”. In some cases, when the expectation level that the pseudo-continuous effect is generated is low in the special figure variation display game being executed, a notice display “Pseudo-continuous ???” is displayed.
Next, “8” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the display number (8) of the notice display is not larger than the number of available notice effect areas (8) (step C548; N), as shown in the fifth row from the top in FIG. In addition, a notice display “Pseudo train !!!!!!” or a notice display “Pseudo train ??????” is displayed in the notice effect possible area (step C550).
When the number of decoration special figure start memory displays C displayed in the start memory display area 41b is “0”, “!” Or “ It is also possible to change the number of?

When “notice effect pattern B1” is selected as the notice display mode, a prefetch notice effect as shown in FIG. 80B is executed in the start memory display area 41b.
Specifically, first, notice display initial data for displaying a notice display of “pseudo train! □□□” is acquired (step C545).
Next, in this example, since four decoration special figure start memory displays C are displayed in the start memory display area 41b, “3” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be provided (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the number of display of the notice display (7) is larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (3) (step C548; Y), and “□□□” is determined as a part of the notice display to be displayed. (Step C549).
Next, as shown in the first row (uppermost row) from the top in FIG. 80 (b), a notice display “□□□” is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

When one hold is consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and notice display data for displaying the notice display “pseudo-ream! C543).
Next, “4” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the number of display of the notice display (7) is larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (4) (step C548; Y), and “! □□□” is displayed as a part of the notice display to be displayed. It is determined (step C549).
Next, as shown in the second row from the top in FIG. 80 (b), a notice display “! □□□” is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

Further, when one hold is consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and notice display data for displaying the notice display “Pseudo-ream! □□□” is acquired ( Step C543).
Next, “5” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the number of display of the notice display (7) is larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (5) (step C548; Y), and “ream! Is determined (step C549).
Next, as shown in the third row from the top in FIG. 80 (b), the notice display “RE !! □□□” is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

Further, when one hold is consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and notice display data for displaying the notice display “Pseudo-ream! □□□” is acquired ( Step C543).
Next, “6” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the number of display of the notice display (7) is larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (6) (step C548; Y). Is determined (step C549).
Next, as shown in the fourth row from the top in FIG. 80 (b), a notice display “Niiren! □□□” is displayed in the notice effect available area (step C550).

Further, when one hold is consumed, it is determined that it is time to update the notice (step C542; Y), and the notice display data for displaying the notice display “pseudo-ream! The notice display data for displaying the notice display “□□□” is acquired (step C543). In the case of the present embodiment, the number of decoration special figure start memory displays C displayed in the start memory display area 41b is “0”, and a pseudo-continuous effect is produced in the special figure fluctuation display game being executed. When the degree of expectation to be generated is high, a notice display “Pseudo-continuous! □□□” is displayed, and the number of decoration special figure start memory display C displayed in the start memory display area 41b is “0”. In this case, when the expectation level that the pseudo-continuous effect is generated is low in the special figure variation display game being executed, the notice display “Pseudo-continuity? □□□” is displayed.
Next, “8” is acquired as the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (step C546).
Next, it is determined that the display number (7) of the notice display is not larger than the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (8) (step C548; N), as shown in the fifth row from the top in FIG. In addition, a notice display “Pseudo train! □□□” or a notice display “Pseudo train? □□□” is displayed in the noticeable effect possible area (step C550).

When “notice effect pattern B2” is selected as the notice display mode, a prefetch notice effect as shown in FIG. 80C is executed in the start memory display area 41b. Note that when “notice effect pattern B2” is selected, the content of the notice display is different from that when “notice effect pattern B1” is selected, and thus detailed description is omitted.
When “notice effect pattern B3” is selected as the notice display mode, a prefetch notice effect as shown in FIG. 80 (d) is executed in the start memory display area 41b. Here, when “notice effect pattern B3” is selected, as shown in the fifth row from the top in FIG. 80 (d), a notice indication ““ character ”pseudo-continuity? It is displayed in the effectable area, and is configured to notify that the prefetching notice effect is “Gasse” (a false prefetching notice effect). Note that when “notice effect pattern B3” is selected, the content of the notice display is different from the case where “notice effect pattern B1” is selected, except that the prefetch notice effect is “Gasse”. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.
In addition, in the above “notice effect pattern”, the notice display regarding “pseudo-ream” is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice object such as reach notice display or jackpot notice display can be set as appropriate.

Thus, in this embodiment, regardless of the current gaming state, when “notice effect pattern A” is selected, a notice display that does not include “□ (space)” is displayed. When “B” is selected, a notice display including “□ (space)” is displayed.
In FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, the notice display is updated in accordance with the digestion of the hold, but the notice display is updated in accordance with the change in the number of areas where the notice effect can be performed (the use of the hold effect or the occurrence of the additional hold). .

<Modification>
In the second embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is displayed to display the notice display in the noticeable effectable area of the start memory display area 41b. For example, the empty small area is determined by the prior determination means (game control device 100). A free small area displayed in a display mode in which any of a plurality of determinable results is displayed in advance, and is displayed in a display mode in which a prefetch result for the start-up memory is notified in advance as a pre-reading notice effect. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect of displaying the decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the start memory.

In the present modification, any one of a plurality of free area display symbols is displayed for one free small area constituting the noticeable effect possible area. Each free space display symbol can be notified in advance of any of a plurality of results that can be determined by the prior determination means (game control device 100).
As shown in FIG. 82, the vacant area display symbol includes “V” indicating the big hit confirmation, “heat” indicating that the big hit expectation is high, “SP” indicating that the SP reach production is expected to be high, There are “ream” indicating that the expected degree of occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect is high, “?” Indicating that these expected degrees are low, and the like. Of course, in the free space display pattern, notices other than the notice contents shown here (that is, big hit confirmation, big hit expectation level, SP reach production occurrence expectation level, pseudo-continuation production occurrence expectation level) A symbol representing the content may be included, and for example, a symbol (for example, “motion”) indicating that the degree of expectation that the predetermined accessory is activated may be included. Also, the free space display symbol can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the free space display symbol indicating the big hit decision may be “to” or the like.
In the present modification, the noticeable effect possible area is configured by all the empty small areas in the start memory display area 41b.

Then, when an additional hold occurs, the effect control device 300 displays a free small area in which a free area display pattern for notifying (suggesting) a pre-reading result for the additional hold is displayed among the free small areas constituting the advance notice possible area. In addition, by displaying the decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the additional hold, the prefetch result for the additional hold is notified (implied).
That is, the start memory display control means (the effect control device 300), as a notice effect, has a free small area (displayed in a display mode in which a prior determination result (prefetch result) for the start memory is notified among the plurality of free small areas ( In the case of this modification, a start memory display corresponding to the start memory (decoration special figure start memory display) is displayed in a free space display pattern in which an advance determination result (prefetch result) for the start memory is notified. An effect of displaying C) can be executed.

[Pre-reading notice scenario control process]
In this modified example, the prefetch notice scenario control process shown in FIG. 81 is executed instead of the prefetch notice scenario control process shown in FIG.
In the pre-reading notice scenario control process, the effect control device 300 first determines whether a start winning (additional hold) has occurred (step C641).
When the start winning is not generated (step C641; N), it is determined whether the notice display is already performed (step C648). When the notice display is already performed (step C648; Y), the step is performed. When the process proceeds to the process of C646 and the notice display is not performed (step C648; N), the prefetch notice scenario control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the start winning is generated (step C641; Y), the notice display mode is selected by lottery (step C642), and free space display data corresponding to the result of the lottery is acquired (step C643). In Step C642, for example, a notice display mode selection table as shown in FIG. 82 is referred to, and a random number lottery is performed to select a notice display mode. It is also possible to store a plurality of notice display mode selection tables and determine which one of the plurality of notice display mode selection tables is to be referred to based on the jackpot expectation level or the like.
Then, a free space display (free space display symbol group) based on the acquired free space display data is displayed in the noticeable effect possible region. Specifically, only the free space display symbols arranged in the small free space are displayed among the plurality of free space display symbols constituting the free space display. Therefore, in the small area where the decoration special figure start memory display C has already been displayed, the empty area display symbol is not displayed, and the decoration special figure start storage display C remains displayed.

Next, a hold display (decoration special figure start memory display C) corresponding to the start memory is displayed in the display area (empty small area) corresponding to the expectation (prefetch result) of the newly added start memory (addition hold). It is displayed (step C644). Specifically, the decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the start memory is displayed in the empty small area in which a free area display pattern for announcing the prefetch result for the newly added start memory is displayed.
Here, which one of a plurality of free space display symbols (in the case of this modification, “V”, “heat”, “SP”, “ream”, and “?”) Is selected in advance is set. It is decided according to the ratio.

For example, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the newly added start memory is a big hit, the ratio of “heat” is selected higher than “?”, And when it is out of place, “heat” “?” Can be set to be selected more frequently than “?”. When “heat” is selected, “V” can be set to be selected instead of “heat” at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of less than 50%). Note that “V” may be selectable only when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the newly added start memory is a big hit.
When “V” is selected, the decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the start memory is displayed in the empty small area where “V” is displayed. If there is no free small area displaying “V” in the free small areas constituting the noticeable effect available area, even though “V” is selected, instead of “V”, for example, “?” (May be “heat”) is selected.
When “heat” is selected, the decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the start memory is displayed in the small empty area where “heat” is displayed. If there is no free small area where “heat” is displayed in the free small areas constituting the noticeable effect available area even though “heat” is selected, instead of “heat”, for example, “?” (May be “V”) is selected.
When “?” Is selected, the decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the start memory is displayed in the empty small area where “?” Is displayed.

Also, for example, in the special figure variation display game based on the newly added start memory, when the SP reach effect is generated, “SP” is selected more frequently than “?”, And the SP reach effect is generated. If it does not occur, “?” Can be set to be selected more frequently than “SP”.
When “SP” is selected, the decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the start memory is displayed in the empty small area where “SP” is displayed. If “SP” is selected but there is no free small area displaying “SP” in the free small areas that constitute the noticeable effect possible area, instead of “SP”, for example, “?” Is selected.

Further, for example, in the special figure variation display game based on the newly added start memory, when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs, the ratio of selecting “ream” is higher than “?”, And the pseudo-continuous effect is If it does not occur, “?” Can be set to be selected more frequently than “ream”.
When “ream” is selected, the decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the start memory is displayed in the empty small area where “ream” is displayed. If there is no empty small area where “ream” is displayed in the free small areas that constitute the noticeable effect possible area even though “ream” is selected, instead of “ream”, for example, “?” Is selected.

  Next, the display area suggestion display E is displayed in correspondence with the displayed hold display (decoration special drawing start storage display C) (step C645). In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 83, a display area suggestion display E having the same pattern as the empty area display pattern displayed in the small area displaying the decoration special figure start storage display C is displayed. Displayed in the vicinity of the memory display C. As a result, it is possible to continue notifying the pre-reading result for the additional hold not only when the decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the additional hold is displayed but also after the display.

Next, it is determined whether a scenario end code is set (step C646).
If the scenario end code is not set (step C646; N), the process proceeds to step C641.
On the other hand, when the scenario end code is set (step C646; Y), the off information of the notice display data is set (step C647), and the prefetch notice scenario control process is finished.

  In Step C642, when a notice display mode that does not display an empty area display is selected as in the notice display form corresponding to the random number “0 to 100” among the notice display forms shown in FIG. 82, Step C644 is used. Then, the decoration special figure start memory display C corresponding to the additional suspension is displayed in any free small area, and the display area suggestion display E is not displayed in step C645. In this case, in step C645, it is also possible to display the display area suggestion display E for announcing the pre-reading result for the additional suspension in the vicinity of the decorative special figure starting storage display C corresponding to the additional suspension.

FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining an example of the prefetching notice effect in the modification of the second embodiment.
When start-up storage (additional hold) occurs (step C641; Y), the notice display mode is selected by lot (step C642), and free space display data corresponding to the result of the lottery is acquired (step C643).
In this example, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the notice display mode corresponding to the random numbers “101 to 120” is selected, and free area display data for displaying the free area display in the selected notice display form is displayed. Has been acquired. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), when the additional suspension occurs, the decorative special figure start storage display C is not displayed in the start storage display area 41b, so that the free area display based on the acquired free area display data is displayed. All (that is, all of the free space display symbols constituting the free space display) are displayed.

Next, “V” is selected as a free space display pattern for announcing the prefetch result for the additional hold, and as shown in FIG. 83 (c), a small area corresponding to the prefetch result for the additional hold (ie, “V” is displayed). The decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the additional suspension is displayed in the small area) (step C644).
Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), a display area suggestion display E is displayed in correspondence with the displayed decorative special figure start storage display C (step C645).

  In this modified example, by displaying any one of a plurality of empty area display symbols for one empty small area constituting the noticeable effect possible area, the empty small area is determined in advance by the determination unit ( Although any one of a plurality of results that can be determined by the game control device 100) is displayed in a display mode for giving a notice, any of the plurality of results that can be determined by the prior determination means (the game control device 100) The display mode for notifying the user is not limited to this, and may be, for example, the color or shape of an empty small area.

Further, for example, it is possible to notify the pre-reading result for the additional hold according to the position of the small area that displays the decorative special figure start memory display C corresponding to the additional hold.
Specifically, for example, the decorative special figure start memory display C displayed in the start memory display area 41b may be rearranged according to the prefetching result (for example, in descending order of the big hit expectation degree). For example, when the start memory display area 41b is an area that is long on the left and right as shown in FIG. Rearrange so that the higher the degree of expectation is, the left side (or the right side may be), or rearrange the order so that the higher the expectation level is, the closer to the center in the left-right direction. It is. In addition, the rearrangement timing can be arbitrarily set as appropriate, such as when the reservation is completed or when additional reservation occurs. Alternatively, a predetermined character may appear at a predetermined timing, and the character may perform an effect of rearranging the decoration special figure start memory display C.
In this way, by rearranging the decoration special figure start memory display C displayed in the start memory display area 41b according to the prefetch result, the prefetch result for the start memory corresponds to the start special memory. Since it can be intuitively understood at the position of the display C, it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that is easy for the player to understand.
In this case, if the digest order is displayed in the decorative special figure start memory display C as in the decorative special figure start memory display C shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, a pre-reading notice effect that is easier to understand for the player is executed. It becomes possible to do.

It is also possible to display a direction suggestion display that suggests a direction to be watched in an empty small area (that is, a small area in which the decorative special figure start storage display C is not displayed).
The direction suggestion display may be any character or symbol that can suggest a direction, and may be, for example, “up”, “down”, “right”, “left”, or “↑”, It may be “↓”, “→”, “←”, or the like.
The direction to be watched is, for example, a direction in which the character displayed on the display device 41 moves, a direction indicating an option selected from a plurality of options displayed on the display device 41, a direction in which an accessory moves, For example, a direction indicating an actuating instrument among a plurality of instruments is used.
Specifically, for example, when a character (which may be a single character or a plurality of characters (character group)) displayed on the display device 41 moves from right to left, When the accessory moves from right to left, for example, “left” or “←” is displayed as the direction suggestion display.
In addition, for example, options are displayed in the upper, lower, right, and left parts of the display area of the display device 41, and when the option on the left side among these options is selected, When an accessory is disposed on each of the upper, lower, right, and left sides, and an accessory on the left of these actors operates, for example, “left” is used as the direction suggestion display. Or “←” is displayed.
Further, the direction suggestion display can be rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction. As a result, the character displayed on the display device 41 rotates, the direction of rotation, and the display mode (for example, color) of a plurality of options displayed on the display device 41 change sequentially in the roulette form, or the change. It is possible to suggest the order and the direction of rotation of the accessory.
It is also possible to configure to display a direction suggestion display as the decorative special figure start memory display C.

  According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the start memory display area 41b is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the start memory display control means (production control device 300) is arranged in one small area. , One start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display C) is displayed, and in an empty small area in which a start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display C) is not displayed among a plurality of small areas, prior determination is performed. It is configured to be able to execute a notice effect for notifying a prior determination result (prefetch result) by the means (game control device 100).

  Accordingly, the preliminary determination result (prefetching result) is notified in advance in an empty small area (small area where the start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display C) is not displayed) among the plurality of small areas included in the start memory display area 41b. Since it is possible to execute a notice effect that is not possible in the past, it is possible to execute a notice effect in an area that the player does not expect, and a start memory display area 41b It is possible to increase the interest of the player with respect to the notice effect performed at

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the start-up memory display control means (the effect control device 300) provides a notice display for notifying a preliminary determination result (prefetch result) in a vacant small area as a notice effect. Can be configured such that an effect of changing the display mode of the notice display according to the number of empty small areas can be executed.

  When configured in this way, a notice display can be displayed in a small empty area as a notice effect, and an effect of changing the display mode of the notice display according to the number of empty small areas can be executed. It is possible to execute a preliminary announcement effect, and it is possible to execute a preliminary announcement effect in an area that the player does not expect, which can bring unexpectedness to the preliminary announcement effect.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the empty small area is displayed in a display mode in which any of a plurality of results that can be determined by the prior determination means (game control device 100) is notified. The start memory display control means (the effect control device 300) is displayed in a display mode in which a preliminary determination result (prefetch result) for the start memory is notified in advance as a notice effect. It is possible to configure so that an effect of displaying a start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display C) corresponding to the start memory can be executed in the area.

  When configured in this way, as a notice effect, a start corresponding to the start memory is displayed in a free small area displayed in a display mode in which a prior determination result (prefetch result) for the start memory is notified in advance among a plurality of free small areas. Since it is possible to execute an effect that displays a memory display (decoration special figure start memory display C), it is possible to execute an innovative notice effect that is not available in the past, and a notice effect that is not anticipated by the player It is possible to do this, and can bring unexpectedness to the notice effect.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls and slot machines that are medals.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 36 start prize opening (start area)
37 Ordinary variable prize-winning device (starting area)
38 First special variable prize device (first variable prize device)
38a Upper count switch (first game ball detecting means)
39 Second special variable prize device (second variable prize device)
39a Lower count switch (second game ball detecting means)
41 Display device (variable display device)
41a Main display area 41b Start storage display area 100 Game control device (winning device control means (conversion condition determination means), valid period setting means, start storage means, advance determination means)
300 effect control device (notice effect execution means, notice effect selection means, event generation means, start memory display control means)
C Decoration special drawing start memory display (start memory display)

Claims (3)

A variable display device capable of executing a variable display game based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area,
In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result,
The display area of the variable display device includes a main display area in which the variable display game is executed, and a start-up storage display area.
Start memory means capable of storing start memory as a right to execute the variable display game based on the inflow of game balls into the start area up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Start memory display control means for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means in the start memory display area;
Pre-determining means for determining the result of the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means before the execution of the variable display game,
The start memory display area is divided into a plurality of small areas,
The start memory display control means includes
One start memory display is displayed in one small area,
A gaming machine capable of executing a notice effect for announcing a preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means in an empty small area of the plurality of small areas where the start memory display is not displayed.   The start memory display control means displays a notice display for notifying the preliminary determination result in the empty small area as the notice effect, and changes the display mode of the notice display according to the number of the empty small areas. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein an effect can be executed. The empty small area is displayed in a display mode for notifying one of the results that can be determined by the prior determination means,
The start memory display control means corresponds to the start memory in the empty small area displayed in the display mode for notifying the advance determination result for the start memory among the plurality of empty small areas as the notice effect. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein an effect of displaying a start memory display to be performed can be executed.